Home

SQL*Plus User`s Guide and Reference

1. Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE Cost 1 Card 263 Bytes 5786 1 0 SORT AGGREGATE 2 T NESTED LOOPS Cost 1 Card 263 Bytes 5785 08200 3 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF D2_T2 08200 4 2 INDEX UNIQUE SCAN OF D2_I_UNIQUE1 UNIQUE 208200 2 PARALLEL TO SERIAL SELECT ORDERED NO_EXPAND USE_NL A2 INDEX A2 PIV_SSF COUNT A1 CO FROM SELECT ROWID A3 A3 UNIQUE1 FROM D2 _T2 A3 WHERE ROWID BETWEEN 1 AND 2 Al D2_T1 A2 WHERE A1 CO A2 UNIQUE1 3 PARALLEL COMBINED WITH PAREN 4 PARALLEL COMBINED WITH PAREN Manipulating Commands 3 41 Tracing Statements Line 0 of the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates the number of rows at 263 taking 5786 bytes The total cost of the statement is 1 Lines 2 3 and 4 are marked with asterisks denoting parallel operations For example the NESTED LOOPS step on line 2 is a PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operation PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operations execute a SQL statement to produce output serially Line 2 also shows that the parallel query server had the identifier Q8200 3 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 4 Formatting Query Results This chapter explains how to format your query results to produce a finished report This chapter covers the following topics a Formatting Columns a Clarifying Your Report with S
2. DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 1300 MANAGER CLARK 2450 FRASERIN E KERER EEEE OOOO l sum 3750 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 20 CLERK SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 VERR Re MTT REBT TORR Ree T e TO O O O ay sum 1900 DEPTNO JOB ENAMF SAL 30 CLERK JAMES 950 SALESMAN ALLE 1600 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 KKEKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKRK osso Oa sum 6550 To compute the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 3 4 HERE DEPTNO lt 20 RDER BY DEPTNO Of 4nw 8 4 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAI SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 8750 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 10875 To compute the salaries at the end of the report SQL gt COLU DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SQL gt SELECT NULL DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FRO Wl Q 3 HERE DEPTNO lt 20 4 RDER BY DEPTN
3. Command Reference 8 147 VARIABLE x x Departmental Salary Bill Department Employee Salary ACCOUNTING CLARK 2 450 00 KING 5 000 00 MILLER 1 300 00 KKK KKK KERR KKK oO OO l ae Subtotal 8 750 00 RESEARCH ADAMS 1 100 00 FORD 3 000 00 JONES 2 975 00 SCOTT 3 000 00 SMITH 800 00 PETIT TI ae RI Re ellis Subtotal 10 875 00 SALES ALLE 1 600 00 BLAKE 2 850 00 JAMES 950 00 MARTIN 1 250 00 TURNER 1 500 00 WARD 1 250 00 FERREE Ee ee ee a Brains Subtotal 9 400 00 Total 29 025 00 The following example illustrates producing a report containing a CLOB column and then displaying it with the SET LOBOFFSET command Assume you have already created a table named clob_tab which contains a column named clob_col of type CLOB The clob_col contains the following data Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information 8 148 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE To produce a report listing the data in the col_clob column enter SQL gt variable t clob SQL gt begin 2 select clob_col into t from clob_tab 3 end 4 PL SQL procedure successfully completed To print 200 characters from the column clob_col enter SQL gt set LONG 200 SQL gt print t The following output results T Remem
4. Accessing SQL Databases 6 9 Copying Data between Tables on One Database 6 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part Il Reference This section provides an overview of how to start SQL Plus It also provides a Command Reference that contains a description of each SQL Plus command The following chapters and appendices are covered in this section Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help Command Reference Appendix A COPY Command Messages and Codes Appendix B Release 8 1 5 Enhancements Appendix C SQL Plus Limits Appendix D SQL Command List Appendix E Security Appendix F SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help This chapter explains how to access SQL Plus from the operating system prompt and discusses the following topics a Starting SOL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command a Getting Help Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 1 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command You can start SQL Plus from the operating system prompt by entering the SQLPLUS command in the following form SQLPLUS S ILENT logon start where logon Requires the following syntax username password net_service_name NOLOG start Allows you to enter the name of a command file and arguments SQL Plus passes the arguments to the command file as though you executed
5. gt gt a You may find it easier to enter and edit long COPY commands in command files rather than trying to enter them directly at the command prompt Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table You control the treatment of the destination table by entering one of four control clauses REPLACE CREATE INSERT or APPEND The REPLACE clause names the table to be created in the destination database and specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY creates it using the copied data 6 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another You can use the CREATE clause to avoid accidentally writing over an existing table CREATE specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY reports an error and stops a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY creates the table using the copied data Use INSERT to insert data into an existing table INSERT specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY reports an error and stops Use APPEND when you want to insert data in an existing table or create a new tabl
6. COLUMN column_name NEW_VALUE variable_name You must include the master column in an ORDER BY clause and in a BREAK command using the SKIP PAGE clause Example 4 23 Creating a Master Detail Report Suppose you want to create a report that displays two different managers employee numbers each at the top of a separate page and the people reporting to the manager on the same page as the manager s employee number First create a variable MGRVAR to hold the value of the current manager s employee number SQL gt COLUMN MGR NEW_VALUE MGRVAR NOPRINT Because you will display the managers employee numbers in the title you do not want them to print as part of the detail The NOPRINT clause you entered above tells SOL Plus not to print the column MGR 4 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Next include a label and the value in your page title enter the proper BREAK command and suppress the bottom title from the last example SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Manager MGRVAR SKIP 2 SQL gt BREAK ON MGR SKIP PAGE SQL gt BIITLE OFF Finally enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT MGR ENAME SAL DEPTNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE MGR IN 7698 7839 4 ORDER BY MGR SQL Plus displays the following output lana
7. 2 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Getting Help The following output results Name Null Type DEPTNO NOT NULL NUMBER 2 DNAME VARCHAR2 14 LOC VARCHAR2 13 Note DESCRIBE accesses information in the Oracle data dictionary You can also use SQL SELECT commands to access this and other information in the database See your Oracle8i SQL Reference for details Listing PL SQL Definitions To see the definition of a function or procedure use the SOL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 2 7 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the definition of a function called AFUNC enter SQL gt DESCRIBE afunc The following output results FUNCTION afunc RETURNS NUMBER Argument Name Type In Out Default F1 CHAR IN F2 NUMBER IN Controlling the Display Suppose that you wish to stop and examine the contents of the screen while displaying a long report or the definition of a table with many columns Press Pause Refer to Table 2 1 to see how Pause is labelled on your keyboard The display will pause while you examine it To continue press Resume If you wish you can use the PAUSE variable of the SQL Plus SET command to have SQL Plus pause after displaying each screen of a query or report For more information refer to the SET command in Chapter 8 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 17 Getting Help Interpreting Error Messages If
8. Displaying the Page Number and other System Maintained Values in Titles You can display the current page number and other system maintained values in your title by entering a system value name as a title element for example TTITLE LEFT system maintained_value_name There are five system maintained values you can display in titles the most commonly used of which is SQL PNO the current page number For a list of system maintained values you can display in titles see the TTITLE command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 4 21 Displaying the Current Page Number in a Title To display the current page number at the top of each page along with the company name enter the following command SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query SQL gt 4 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions SQL Plus displays the following results ACME WIDGET PAGE 1 DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Note that SQL PNO has a format ten spaces wide You can change this format with the FORMAT clause of TTITLE or BTITLE Example 4 22 Formatting a System Maintained Value in a Title To close up the space between the wo
9. 4 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results To list the current values of these variables use the SHOW command SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 24 SQL gt SHOW NEWPAGE newpage 1 SQL gt SHOW LINESIZE linesize 80 Through the SQL Plus command SPOOL you can store your query results in a file or print them on your computer s default printer Sending Results to a File To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name SQL Plus stores all information displayed on the screen after you enter the SPOOL command in the file you specify Storing and Printing Query Results Send your query results to a file when you want to edit them with a word processor before printing or include them in a letter memo or other document To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name If you do not follow the filename with a period and an extension SPOOL adds a default file extension to the filename to identify it as an output file The default varies with the host operating system on most hosts it is LST or LIS See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for more information SQL Plus continues to spool information to the file until yo
10. 8 154 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference A COPY Command Messages and Codes This appendix lists error messages generated by the COPY command For error messages generated by Oracle refer to the Oracle8i Error Messages manual CPY0002 Illegal or missing APPEND CREATE INSERT or REPLACE option Cause An internal COPY function has invoked COPY with a create option flag value that is out of range Action Please contact your Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services representative CPY0003 Internal Error logical host number out of range Cause An internal COPY function has been invoked with a logical host number value that is out of range Action Please contact your Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services representative CPY0004 Source and destination table and column names don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column name in the destination table does not match the corresponding column name in the optional column name list or in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the column names and their respective order in the destination table match the column names and column order in the optional column list or in the SELECT command COPY Command Messages and Codes A 1 CPY0005 Source and destination column attributes don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column
11. Created file STATS Now run the command file STATS and respond as shown below to the prompts for values SQL gt STATS Enter value for group col JOB old 1 SELEC amp GROUP_COL new 1 SELEC JOB nter value for number_col SAL za old 23 AX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM new 2a AX SAL MAXIMUM Enter value for table EMP old 3 FRO amp TABLE new 3 FRO EMP Enter value for group_col JOB old 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL new 4 GROUP BY JOB SQL Plus displays the following output JOB MAXIMUM ANALYST 3000 CLERK 1300 MANAGER 2975 PRESIDENT 5000 SALESMAN 1600 3 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands If you wish to append characters immediately after a substitution variable use a period to separate the variable from the character For example SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP WHERE EMPNO amp X 01 Enter value for X 123 is interpreted as SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP WHERE EMPNO 12301 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values Suppose you wanted to expand the file STATS to include the minimum sum and average of the number column You may have noticed that SQL Plus prompted you twice for the value of GROUP_COL and once for the value of NUMBER_COL in Example 3 12 and that each GROUP_COL or
12. One or more optional items If two items appear separated by enter one of the items separated by Do not enter the brackets or A choice of mandatory items enter one of the items separated by Do not enter the braces or A default value if you enter nothing SQL Plus assumes the underlined value Preceding item s may be repeated any number of times Enter other punctuation marks such as parentheses where shown in the command syntax Sample Tables Many of the concepts and operations in this Guide are illustrated by a set of sample tables These tables contain personnel records for a fictitious company As you complete the exercises in this Guide imagine that you are the personnel director for this company Introduction 1 5 Using this Guide The exercises make use of the information in two sample tables EMP Contains information about the employees of the sample company DEPT Contains information about the departments in the company Figure 1 1 and Figure 1 2 show the information in these tables Figure 1 1 EMP Table PNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 7499 ALLE SALESMAN 7698 20 FEB 81 1600 300 30 7521 WARD SALESMAN 7698 22 FEB 81 1250 500 30 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02 APR 81 2975 20 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 7698 28 SEP 8
13. The absence of a value NUMBER datatype A standard Oracle datatype A NUMBER column can contain a number with or without a decimal point and a sign and can have from 1 to 105 decimal digits only 38 digits are significant NVARCHAR2 datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NVARCHAR2 datatype specifies a variable length NCHAR string NVARCHAR2 width specifications refer to the number of characters if the national character set is fixed width and to the number of bytes if the national character set is varying width The maximum column size allowed is 4000 bytes object An object is an instance of an object type In Oracle8 objects can be persistent i e stored in the database or transient i e PL SQL or Oracle Call Interface OCD variables See also object type object relational model A database model that combines the key aspects of the relational and object data models into a single system Oracle8 is an object relational database system object type A user defined type that models a structure and behavior of an object Equivalent to the concept of a class in different programming languages In Oracle8 object types have public interfaces with attributes and methods Object types are also known as abstract data types online redo log 1 Redo log files that have not been archived but are either available to the instance for recording database activity or are filled and waiting to be archived or reused 2 A
14. 14 rows selected Execution Plan SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOS MERGE JOIN SORT JOIN ABLE ACCESS FULL OF DEPT SORT JOIN ABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP Gl OB WN FO BrP NY FO Statistics 148 recursive calls 4 db block gets 24 consistent gets 6 physical reads 43 redo size 591 bytes sent via SOQL Net to client 256 bytes received via SOQL Net from client 3 SOQL Net roundtrips to from client 2 sort memory 0O sort disk 14 rows processed 3 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Note Your output may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configuration of the server Example 3 22 Tracing Statements Without Displaying Query Data To trace the same statement without displaying the query data SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY SQL gt Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE 1 0 ERGE JOIN 2 1 SORT JOIN 3 2 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF DEPT 4 1 SORT JOIN 5 4 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP Statistics 0 recursive calls 4 db block gets 2 consistent gets 0 physical reads 0 redo size 599 bytes sent via SOL Net to client 256 bytes received via SOQL Net from client 3 SQL Net roundtrips to from client 2 sort memo
15. ON registers command files invoked by the or START commands OFF disables registering of command files Instead the current value of text is registered Text specifies the text to register when no command file is being run or when APPINFO is OFF The default for text is SQL Plus If you enter multiple words for text you must enclose them in quotes The maximum length for text is limited by the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package The registered name has the format nn xfilename where nn is the depth level of command file x is lt when the command file name is truncated otherwise it is blank and filename is the command file name possibly truncated to the length allowed by the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package interface Note To use this feature you must have access to the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package Run DBMSUTIL SQL this name may vary depending on your operating system as SYS to create the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package DBMSUTIL SQL is part of the Oracle8 database server product For more information on the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package see the Oracle8i Tuning manual ARRAY SIZE 15 n Sets the number of rows called a batch that SQL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 A large value increases the efficiency of queries and subqueries that fetch many rows but requires more memory Values over approximately 100 provide little added performance ARRAYSIZE has no effect on
16. SQL gt REPFOOTER PAGE CENTER END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT SQL gt TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SOL PNO SQL gt SELECT ENAME SAL ROM EMP 2 F 3 WHERE SAL gt 2000 Command Reference 8 91 REPFOOTER Page 1 ENAME SAL JONES 2975 BLAKE 2850 CLARK 2450 SCOTT 3000 KING 5000 FORD 3000 Page 2 END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT To suppress the report footer without changing its definition enter SQL gt REPFOOTER OFF 8 92 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER REPHEADER Purpose Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition Syntax REPH EADER PAGE printspec text variable OFF ON where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n S KIP n TAB n LE F CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause These terms and clauses also apply to the REPFOOTER command PAGE Begins a new page after printing the specified report header or before printing the specified report footer text Represents the report header or footer text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line The default is NULL variable Represents a user v
17. amp amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM SQL gt I 3i MIN amp amp ER_COL MINIMUM 4i SUM amp amp NUMBER_COL TOTAL 5i AVG amp amp BER_COL AVERAGE 6i SOL gt 1 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL SQL gt C amp amp amp 1 SELECT amp amp GROUP_COL SOL gt 7 7 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL SQL gt C amp amp amp 7 GROUP BY amp amp GROUP_COL SQL gt SAVE STATS2 created file STATS2 Finally run the command file STATS2 and respond to the prompts for values as follows SQL gt START STATS2 Enter value for group col JOB Enter value for number_col SAL Enter value for table EMP SQL Plus displays the following output JOB MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE ANALYST 3000 3000 6000 3000 CLERK 1300 800 4150 1037 5 MANAGER 2975 2450 8275 2758 33333 PRESIDENT 5000 5000 5000 5000 SALESMAN 1600 1250 5600 1400 Note that you were prompted for the values of NUMBER_COL and GROUP_COL only once If you were to run STATS2 again during the current session you would be prompted for TABLE because its name has a single ampersand and the variable is therefore not DEFINEd but not for GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL because their names have double ampersands and the variables are therefore DEFINEd SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands Before continuing set the system variabl
18. 6 WHERE JOB SALESMAN SQL gt CHANGE SALESMAN amp 1 6 WHERE JOB amp 1 SOL gt 1 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN SQL gt CHANGE SALESMAN amp 1 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING amp 1 SQL gt SAVE ONEJOB Created file ONEJOB Now run the command with the parameter CLERK SQL gt START ONEJOB CLERK SQL Plus lists the line of the SQL command that contains the parameter before and after replacing the parameter with its value and then displays the output old 3 WHERE JOB amp 1 new 3 WHERE JOB CLERK Ey 3 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands EMPNO CLERK SALARY COMMISSION 7369 SMITH 800 7876 ADAMS 1 100 7900 JAMES 950 7934 MILLER 1 300 You can use any number of parameters in a command file Within a command file you can refer to each parameter any number of times and can include the parameters in any order Note You cannot use parameters when you run a command with RUN or slash You must store the command in a command file and run it with START or Before continuing return the column ENAME to its original heading by entering the following command SQL gt COLUMN ENAME CLEAR Communicating with the User Three SQL Plus commands PROMPT ACCEPT and PAUSE help you communicate with the end user These commands enable you to send message
19. 8 49 CONTINUE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 152 Continuing a long SOL Plus command 2 12 8 1 Conventions command syntax 1 4 COPY command 6 4 8 51 and at sign 6 5 8 51 and ARRAYSIZE variable 6 8 8 53 and COPYCOMMIT variable 6 8 8 53 and LONG variable 6 8 8 53 APPEND clause 6 7 8 52 copying data between databases 6 4 copying data between tables on one database 6 9 CREATE clause 6 7 8 52 creating atable 6 6 6 7 8 52 destination table 6 5 8 51 determining actions 6 5 determining source rows and columns 6 6 8 52 disabling E 5 FROM clause 6 5 8 52 INSERT clause 6 7 8 52 inserting data in a table 6 7 8 52 interpreting messages 6 8 mandatory net service name 8 51 naming the source table with SELECT 6 6 8 52 query 6 6 8 52 referring to another user s table 6 8 REPLACE clause 6 6 8 52 replacing data in a table 6 6 8 52 sample command 6 5 6 6 service name 6 5 6 7 6 9 specifying column names for destination 8 51 specifying the data to copy 6 6 8 52 TO clause 6 5 8 52 username password 6 5 6 7 6 9 8 51 8 52 USING clause 6 6 8 52 when a commit is performed 8 53 Copy command specifying column names for destination 6 5 COPYCOMMIT variable 8 105 relationship to COPY command 6 8 8 53 COPYTYPECHECK variable 8 105 COUNT function 4 17 CREATE clause in COPY command 6 7 8 52 CREATE command disabling E 6 entering PL SQL 2 9 Creating flat files
20. 8 77 loading contents into host system editor 3 7 8 66 saving contents 3 8 8 98 BUFFER clause 3 2 3 9 8 30 BUFFER variable F 3 C CANCEL clause 8 87 CENTER clause 4 24 4 26 8 94 8 140 CHANGE command 3 2 3 4 8 27 CHAR clause 8 11 VARIABLE command 8 144 CHAR columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 4 6 8 34 CLEAR clause 4 9 8 33 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 20 CLEAR command 8 30 BREAKS clause 4 16 8 30 BUFFER clause 3 2 3 9 8 30 COLUMNS clause 4 9 8 30 COMPUTES clause 4 22 8 30 SCREEN clause 3 30 8 30 SQL clause 8 31 TIMING clause 8 31 CLOB clause VARIABLE command 8 145 Index 3 CLOB columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 8 34 setting maximum width 8 109 setting retrieval position 8 109 setting retrieval size 8 109 CMDSEP variable 8 104 COL clause 4 24 4 27 8 94 8 140 Colons bind variables 3 30 COLSEP variable 8 104 COLUMN command 4 2 8 32 ALIAS clause 8 33 and BREAK command 8 23 and DEFINE command 8 54 CLEAR clause 4 9 8 33 DEFAULT clause F 2 displaying column values in bottom titles 4 31 8 38 displaying column values in top titles 4 30 8 37 entering multiple 8 39 FOLD_AFTER clause 8 33 FOLD_BEFORE clause 8 33 FORMAT clause 4 5 4 7 8 34 formatting columns 4 7 formatting NUMBER columns 4 5 8 34 HEADING clause 4 2 8 36 HEADSEP character 8 36 JUSTIFY clause 8 37 LIKE clause 4 8 8 37 listing a column s display attr
21. Command Reference 8 73 HOST HOST Purpose Executes a host operating system command without leaving SOL Plus Syntax HO ST command Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause command Represents a host operating system command Enter HOST without command to display an operating system prompt You can then enter multiple operating system commands For information on returning to SQL Plus refer to the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Usage Notes With some operating systems you can use a VMS UNIX or another character instead of HOST See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details You may not have access to the HOST command depending on your operating system See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system or ask your DBA for more information SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the HOST command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SOLTERMINATOR See the SOLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information on the SQLTERMINATOR Example To execute an operating system command Is sql enter SQL gt HOST ls sql 8 74 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference INPUT INPUT Purpose Adds one or more new lines of text after the current line in the buffer
22. Copies the data from a query to a table in a local or remote database Syntax COPY FROM username password net_service_name TO username password net_service_name FROM username password net_service_name TO username password net_service_name APPEND CREATE INSERT REPLACE destination_table column column column USING query Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause username password Represent the Oracle username password you wish to COPY FROM and TO In the FROM clause username password identifies the source of the data in the TO clause username password identifies the destination If you do not specify password in either the FROM clause or the TO clause SQL Plus will prompt you for it SQL Plus suppresses the display of your response to these prompts net_service_name Consists of a Net8 connection string You must include a net_service_ name clause in the COPY command In the FROM clause net_service_ name represents the database at the source in the TO clause net_service_ name represents the database at the destination The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol your Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA destination_table Represents the table you wish to create or to which you wish to add data column column co
23. DBA 1 A person responsible for the operation and maintenance of an Oracle database server or a database application The database administrator monitors its use in order to customize it to meet the needs of the local community of users 2 An Oracle username that has been given DBA privileges and can perform database administration functions Usually the two meanings coincide There may be more than one DBA per site database instance failure Failure that occurs when a problem arises that prevents an Oracle database instance SGA and background processes from continuing to work Instance failure may result from a hardware problem such as power outage or a software problem such as operating system crash When an instance failure occurs the data in the buffers of the SGA is not written to the datafiles database link An object stored in the local database that identifies a remote database a communication path to the remote database and optionally a username and password for it Once defined a database link can be used to perform queries on tables in the remote database Also called DBlink In SQL Plus you can reference a database link in a DESCRIBE or COPY command database object Something created and stored in a database Tables views synonyms indexes sequences clusters and columns are all examples of database objects database server The node or computer at which the ORACLE Server kernel runs The database server
24. Declares a bind variable that can then be referenced in PL SQL For more information on bind variables see Using Bind Variables in Chapter 3 For more information about PL SQL see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE without arguments displays a list of all the variables declared in the session VARIABLE followed only by a variable name lists that variable Syntax VAR IABLE variable NUMBER CHAR CHAR n NCHAR NCHAR n VARCHAR2 n NVARCHAR2 n CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable Represents the name of the bind variable you wish to create NUMBER Creates a variable of type NUMBER with a fixed length CHAR Creates a variable of type CHAR character with a length of one CHAR n Creates a variable of type CHAR with a maximum length of n up to 2000 NCHAR Creates a variable of type NCHAR national character with a length of one NCHAR n Creates a variable of type NCHAR with a maximum length of n up to 2000 VARCHAR2 n Creates a variable of type VARCHAR2 with a maximum length of n up to 4000 8 144 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE NVARCHAR2 n Creates a a variable of type NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING with a maximum length of n up to 4000 CLOB Creates a variable of type CLOB NCLOB Creates a variable of type NCLOB REFCURSOR Creates a variable of type REF C
25. SQL gt BTITLE COL 50 CONFIDENTIAL TAB 6 23 Nov 1998 8 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE CHANGE Purpose Changes the first occurrence of text on the current line in the buffer Syntax C HANGE sepchar old sepchar new sepchar Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause sepchar old new myn Represents any non alphanumeric character such as or Use a sepchar that does not appear in old or new You can omit the space between CHANGE and the first sepchar Represents the text you wish to change CHANGE ignores case in searching for old For example CHANGE ag aw will find the first occurrence of aq AQ aQ or Aq and change it to aw SQL Plus inserts the new text exactly as you specify it mom If old is prefixed with it matches everything up to and including the first occurrence of old If it is suffixed with it matches the first occurrence of old and everything that follows on that line If it contains an embedded it matches everything from the preceding part of old through the following part of old Represents the text with which you wish to replace old If you omit new and optionally the second and third sepchars CHANGE deletes old from the current line of the buffer Command Reference 8 27 CHANGE Usage Notes CHANGE changes the first occurrence of the existing s
26. Some operating environments require that service names be placed in double quotes Examples The following command copies the entire EMP table to a table named WESTEMP Note that the tables are located in two different databases If WESTEMP already exists SOL Plus replaces the table and its contents The columns in WESTEMP have the same names as the columns in the source table EMP SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER HQ TO JOHN CHROME WEST gt REPLACE WESTEMP gt USING SELECT FROM EMP The following command copies selected records from EMP to the database to which SQL Plus is connected SQL Plus creates SALESMEN through the copy SQL Plus copies only the columns EMPNO and ENAME and at the destination names them EMPNO and SALESMAN SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER HQ gt CREATE SALESMEN EMPNO SALESMAN gt USING SELECT EMPNO ENAME FROM EMP gt WHERE JOB SALESMAN Command Reference 8 53 DEFINE DEFINE Purpose Specifies a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables Syntax DEF INE variable variable text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable Represents the user variable whose value you wish to assign or
27. defines the report header the REPFOOTER command defines the report footer A TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command consists of the command name followed by one or more clauses specifying a position or format and a CHAR value you wish to place in that position or give that format You can include multiple sets of clauses and CHAR values TTITLE position_clause s char_value position_clause s char value BTITLE position_clause s char value position_clause s char value F F EPHEADER position clause s char value position _ clause s char value EPFOOTER position clause s char value position clause s char value The most often used clauses of TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER are summarized in the following table For descriptions of all TTITLE BTITLE Formatting Query Results 4 23 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions REPHEADER and REPFOOTER clauses see the TTITLE and REPHEADER commands in Chapter 8 Table 4 2 Often Used Clauses of TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER Clause Example Description COL n COL 72 Makes the next CHAR value appear in the specified column of the line SKIP n SKIP 2 Skips to a new line n times If n is greater than 1 n 1 blank lines appear before the next CHAR value LEF LEF Left aligns the following CHAR value CENTER CENTER Centers the following CHAR value RIGHT RIGHT
28. enter the EXIT command at the SQL Plus command prompt 2 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands Example 2 2 Exiting SQL Plus To leave SQL Plus enter the EXIT command at the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt EXIT SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle from which you disconnected and the versions of tools available through SQL Plus After a moment you will see the operating system prompt Before continuing with this chapter follow steps 3 4 and 5 of Example 2 1 to start SQL Plus again Alternatively log in using the shortcut shown under Shortcuts to Starting SQL Plus above Entering and Executing Commands Entering Commands Your computer s cursor or pointer typically an underline a rectangular block or a slash appears after the command prompt The cursor indicates the place where the next character you type will appear on your screen To tell SQL Plus what to do simply type the command you wish to enter Usually you separate the words in a command from each other by a space or tab You can use additional spaces or tabs between words if you wish to make your commands more readable Note You will see examples of spacing and indentation throughout this Guide When you enter the commands in the exercises you do not have to space them as shown but you may find them clearer to read if you do You can enter commands in capitals or lowercase For the sake of clarit
29. enter the following command SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 990 Now rerun the current query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLEN 1 600 300 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MARTIN 1 250 1400 30 TURNER 1 500 0 Formatting Query Results 4 5 Formatting Columns Use a zero in your format model as shown above when you use other formats such as a dollar sign and wish to display a zero in place of a blank for zero values Note The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format or exit from SOL Plus Formatting Datatypes When displaying datatypes you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command Datatypes in this manual include the following variables a CHAR a NCHAR a VARCHAR2 VARCHAR a NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING a DATE a LONG a CLOB a NCLOB Note The NCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING CLOB and NCLOB datatypes require Oracle8 or higher Default Display The default width of datatype columns is the width of the column in the database The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SQOL Plus is derived from the NLS parameters in effect Otherwise the default format width is A9 For more information on formatting DATE columns see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 Note The d
30. format UM WIDTH 10 n PAGES IZE 24 n PAU SE OFF ON text ECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF ECSEPCHAR _ c SERVEROUT PUT OFF ON SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE SHOW MODE OFF ON SOLBL ANKLINES ON OFF SQLC ASE IX ED LO WER UP PER SQLCO NTINUE gt _ text SQOLN UMBER OFF ON E FIX lc SQLP ROMPT SOQL gt text SOLT ERMINATOR c OFF ON SUF FIX SQL text TAB OFF ON E OUT OFF ON I ME OFF ON TIMI NG OFE ON IM OUT OFF ON IMS POOL ON OFEF ID ERLINE c ON OFF IFY OFF ON WRA P OFF ON lt c GI sl Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term clause or system variable APPI NFO ON OFF text Sets automatic registering of command files through the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package This enables the performance and resource usage of each command file to be monitored by your DBA The registered name appears in the MODULE column of the Command Reference 8 101 SET V SESSION and V SQLAREA virtual tables You can also read the registered name using the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO READ_ MODULE procedure
31. you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line 2 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands For example SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 999 gt HEADING SALARY Since SQL Plus identifies the hyphen as a continuation character entering a hyphen within a SQL statement will be ignored by SQL Plus SQL Plus will not identify the statement as a SQL statement until after the input processing has joined the lines together and removed the hyphen For example entering the following will return an error SQL gt select 200 gt 100 from dual select 200 100 from dual ERROR at line 1 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected To ensure that the statement is interpreted correctly move the hyphen from the end of the line Ending a SQL Plus Command You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of aSQL Plus command Variables that Affect Running Commands The SQL Plus command SET controls many variables called system variables the settings of which affect the way SQL Plus runs your commands System variables control a variety of conditions within SQL Plus including default column widths for your output whether SQL Plus displays the number of records sele
32. 2 6 7 5 8 73 HIDE clause 8 12 HOST command 2 16 8 74 disabling E 5 listing command file names with 3 9 Host operating system command prompt 2 3 editor 3 7 8 66 file loading into buffer 8 71 running commands from SQL Plus 2 16 8 74 Hyphen continuing a long SQL Plus command 2 12 8 1 IMMEDIATE mode 8 127 Infinity sign 8 36 Initialization parameters displaying 8 124 INIT ORA file Parameter file 8 132 Input accepting Return 3 30 8 81 accepting values from the user 3 27 8 11 INPUT command 3 2 3 5 8 75 entering several lines 8 75 using with SAVE to create command files 3 9 INSERT clause 6 7 8 52 INSERT command disabling E 6 INSTANCE variable 8 108 Instances multiple sharing a database 8 133 shutting down 8 127 starting 8 132 J JDeveloper Suite 1 3 JUSTIFY clause 8 37 K Keyboard significance of keys on 2 2 Keys Backspace key 2 2 Cancel key 2 2 Interrupt key 2 3 Pause key 2 2 Resume key 2 2 Return key 2 2 L Labels in COMPUTE command 4 17 8 44 LEFT clause 4 24 4 26 8 94 8 140 LIKE clause 4 8 8 20 8 37 Limits SQL Plus C 1 Line numbers for SQL commands 2 6 Lines adding at beginning of buffer 8 75 adding at end of buffer 8 75 adding new after current 3 5 8 75 Index 9 appending text to 3 6 8 13 changing width 4 33 8 108 deleting allin buffer 8 56 deleting from buffer 3 7 8 56 determining which is cur
33. 20 START_DATE DATE 8 116 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET ENALTY RATE VARCHAR 1 RECUR_SALARY NUMBER 10 2 VARCHAR 1 UMBER 10 2 UMBER 5 2 N N To format emp_object so that the output displays with indentation and line numbers use the SET DESCRIBE command as follows SQ gt SET DESCRIBE D EPTH 2 LINENUM ON INDENT ON To SQ gt DESCRIBI display the above settings enter E emp_object The following output results Name Null Type 1 PLOYEE ECUR_PERSON 2 1 NAME VARCHAR2 20 3 1 ADR RECUR_ADDRESS 4 1 ADRI RECUR_ADDRESS1 5 1 DOB DATE 6 1 GENDER VARCHAR2 10 7 DEPT RECUR_DEPARTMENT 8 7 DEPTNO NUMBER 9 7 DEPT_NAI VARCHAR2 20 10 7 LOCATION VARCHAR2 20 11 START_DATE DATE 12 POSITION VARCHAR2 1 13 SAL RECUR_SALARY 14 13 ANNUAL SAL NUMBER 10 2 15 13 EMP_TYPE VARCHAR 1 16 13 CO NUMBER 10 2 17 13 PENALTY_RATE NUMBER 5 2 ESCAPE If you define the escape character as an exclamation point then SQL gt SET ESCAPE SQL gt ACCEPT vl PROMPT Enter amp 1 Command Reference 8 117 SET displays this prompt Enter amp 1 HEADING To suppress the display of column he
34. 21 Syntax conventions 1 4 COPY command 6 5 Syntax rules SQL commands 2 7 SQL Plus commands 2 12 SYSDATE 4 32 SYSDBA clause 8 50 SYSOPER clause 8 50 System variables 2 13 8 114 changing current settings 8 100 listing current settings 2 14 8 123 listing old and new values 8 111 storing and restoring 3 18 used with substitution variables 3 25 System maintained values displaying in headers and footers 8 93 displaying in titles 4 28 8 139 formatting in titles 4 29 T TAB clause 8 94 8 140 TAB variable 8 113 Tables 1 2 access to sample 1 8 controlling destination when copying 6 6 8 52 copying values between 6 4 6 9 8 51 DEPT 1 6 EMP 1 6 listing column definitions 2 16 8 58 referring to another user s when copying 6 8 sample 1 5 TABLESPACE clause 8 87 Tablespaces recovering 8 85 TERMOUT variable 8 113 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 using with SPOOL command 8 129 Text adding to current line with APPEND 3 6 8 13 changing old to new with CHANGE 3 4 8 28 clearing from buffer 3 2 8 30 Text editor host operating system 3 7 8 66 TIME clause in LOGIN SQL 3 18 TIME variable 8 113 TIMING clause 8 31 TIMING command 2 16 8 137 deleting all areas created by 8 31 deleting current area 8 137 SHOW clause 8 137 START clause 8 137 STOP clause 8 137 TIMING variable 8 113 Index 17 Titles aligning elements 4 26 8 140 displaying at bottom of page 4
35. 23 8 26 displaying at top of page 4 23 8 139 displaying column values 4 30 8 37 8 38 displaying current date 4 32 8 37 8 40 displaying page number 4 28 8 142 displaying system maintained values 4 28 8 139 formatting elements 8 141 formatting system maintained values in 4 29 indenting 4 27 8 140 listing current definition 4 30 8 26 8 141 restoring definition 4 30 setting at start or end of report 4 23 setting lines from top of page to top title 4 33 8 109 setting lines from top title to end of page 8 110 setting top and bottom 4 23 8 26 8 139 spacing between last row and bottom title 4 26 suppressing definition 4 30 8 140 TO clause 6 5 8 52 Tracing Statements 3 35 for performance statistics 3 37 for query execution path 3 37 using a database link 3 40 with parallel query option 3 41 TRIMOUT variable 8 113 TRIMSPOOL variable 8 113 TRUNCATE command disabling E 6 TRUNCATE variable F 6 TRUNCATED clause 4 8 8 38 TTITLE clause 8 125 TTITLE command 4 23 8 139 aligning title elements 4 26 8 140 BOLD clause 8 140 CENTER clause 4 24 4 26 8 140 COL clause 4 24 4 27 8 140 FORMAT clause 4 29 8 141 indenting titles 4 27 8 140 LEFT clause 4 24 4 26 8 140 listing current definition 4 30 8 141 most often used clauses 4 23 OFF clause 4 30 8 140 Index 18 old form F 7 ON clause 4 30 referencing column value variable 4 30 8 37 restoring current definition 4 30 RI
36. 3 18 TIME variable 8 113 TIMING variable 8 113 TRIMOUT variable 8 113 TRIMSPOOL variable 8 113 TRUNCATE variable F 6 UNDERLINE variable 4 3 8 113 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 146 VERIFY clause 3 21 VERIFY variable 3 25 8 114 WRAP variable 4 8 8 114 SET command variables system variables 2 13 SET ROLE command disabling E 6 SET TRANSACTION command disabling E 6 SGA clause 8 125 Shared disk systems mounting shared 8 133 Shared mode database 8 133 SHIFTINOUT clause in LOGIN SQL 3 18 SHIFTINOUT variable 8 111 SHOW clause 8 137 SHOW command 2 14 8 123 ALL clause 8 123 BTITLE clause 8 124 ERRORS clause 8 124 listing current page dimensions 4 35 LNO clause 8 124 PNO clause 8 125 RELEASE clause 8 125 REPFOOTER clause 8 125 REPHEADER clause 8 125 SPOOL clause 8 125 SQLCODE clause 8 125 TTITLE clause 8 125 USER clause 8 125 SHOWMODE variable 8 111 SHUTDOWN command 8 127 ABORT variable 8 127 IMMEDIATE variable 8 127 NORMAL variable 8 127 TRANSACTIONAL variable 8 127 SILENT clause 7 2 Site Profile 7 3 SKIP clause in BREAK command 4 13 4 14 8 23 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 8 94 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 26 8 140 Index 15 in TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 4 24 used to place blank lines before bottom title 4 27 SKIP PAGE clause 4 13 4 14 8 24 Slash command 8 10 using with files loaded with GET command 8 71 SPACE variab
37. 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL The LEFT RIGHT and CENTER clauses place the following values at the beginning end and center of the line The SKIP clause tells SQL Plus to move down one or more lines Note that there is no longer any space between the last row of the results and the bottom title The last line of the bottom title prints on the last line of the page The amount of space between the last row of the report and the bottom title depends on 4 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions the overall page size the number of lines occupied by the top title and the number of rows in a given page In the above example the top title occupies three more lines than the top title in the previous example You will learn to set the number of lines per page later in this chapter To always print n blank lines before the bottom title use the SKIP n clause at the beginning of the BTITLE command For example to skip one line before the bottom title in the example above you could enter the following command BTITLE SKIP 1 CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Indenting a Title Element You can use the COL clause in TTITLE or BTITLE to indent the title element a specific number of spaces For example COL 1 places the following values in the first character positio
38. 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter SQL gt REPHEADER OFF Formatting Query Results 4 25 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Positioning Title Elements The report in the preceding exercises might look more attractive if you give the company name more emphasis and place the type of report and the department name on either end of a separate line It may also help to reduce the linesize and thus center the titles more closely around the data You can accomplish these changes by adding some clauses to the TTITLE command and by resetting the system variable LINESIZE as the following example shows You can format report headers and footers in the same way as BTITLE and TTITLE using the REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands Example 4 19 Positioning Title Elements To redisplay the personnel report with a repositioned top title enter the following commands SQL gt TTITLE CENTER A CME WIDGET SKIP 1 gt CENTER SKIP 1 LEFT PERSONNEL REPORT gt RIGHT SALES DEPARTMENT SKIP 2 SQL gt SET LINESIZE 60 SQL gt SQL Plus displays the results ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SALES DEPARTMENT DEPTNO ENAME SAL
39. 4 17 VERIFY clause 3 21 VERIFY variable 3 25 8 114 WwW WARNING clause 8 69 WHENEVER OSERROR command 8 150 COMMIT clause 8 150 CONTINUE clause 8 150 EXIT clause 8 150 NONE clause 8 150 ROLLBACK clause 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR command 3 17 8 152 COMMIT clause 8 152 CONTINUE clause 8 152 EXIT clause 8 152 NONE clause 8 152 ROLLBACK clause 8 152 WORD_WRAPPED clause 4 8 4 10 8 38 WRAP variable 4 8 8 114 WRAPPED clause 4 8 8 38 Index 19 Index 20
40. 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Bonus 30 ALLE 1 600 300 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MARTIN 1 250 1 400 30 TURNER 1 500 0 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes To list the current display attributes for a given column use the COLUMN command followed by the column name only as shown below COLUMN column_name To list the current display attributes for all columns enter the COLUMN command with no column names or clauses after it COLUMN To reset the display attributes for a column to their default values use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command as shown below COLUMN column_name CLEAR To reset the attributes for all columns use the COLUMNS clause of the CLEAR command Example 4 7 Resetting Column Display Attributes to their Defaults To reset all columns display attributes to their default values enter the following command SQL gt CLEAR COLUMNS columns cleared You may wish to place the command CLEAR COLUMNS at the beginning of every command file to ensure that previously entered COLUMN commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Formatting Query Results 4 9 Formatting Columns Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes You can suppress and restore the display attributes you have given a specific column To suppress a column s display attributes e
41. COMPUTE definitions set by the COMPUTE command SCR EEN Clears your screen 8 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CLEAR SQL Clears the text from SQL buffer CLEAR SQL has the same effect as CLEAR BUFFER unless you are using multiple buffers see the SET BUFFER command in Appendix F TIMI NG Deletes all timers created by the TIMING command Example To clear breaks enter SQL gt CLEAR BREAKS To clear column definitions enter SQL gt CLEAR COLUMNS Command Reference 8 31 COLUMN COLUMN Purpose Specifies display attributes for a given column such as text for the column heading a alignment of the column heading a format for NUMBER data wrapping of column data Also lists the current display attributes for a single column or all columns Syntax COL UMN column expr option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS CLE AR HEA DING text Y EFT C ENTER C ENTRE R IGHT LIKE expr alias V ALUE variable OPRI NT PRI NT OLD_V ALUE variable ON OFF WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Terms and Clauses Enter COLUMN followed by column or expr and no other clauses to list the current display attributes for only the specified column or expression Enter COLUMN with no clauses to list all current column disp
42. E E E ESE E a eal mite TAE 8 69 GEP eTa ase AEE coe eE ETa a eaea Ete S EEAS E Geos E E A EEE nae E A 8 71 HELPE aa EEE A EER lean ce E tee elt EE E E E E 8 73 HOST yrende ee ated cess ie a a Na N tie A is abe ee E Mees ect E S 8 74 EN POSE EEE E E EE E EE E S E E A E 8 75 LIST vesist vet isian s e aa isie inasi i eini ana a aisaen 8 77 PASSWORD 5 oiio T a EE E E E E aN 8 79 PAUSE pisie e EE Eaa aaae Ee e EE EEEE mean abe rR isle E TA EE ENES 8 81 PRINT a en e Nea ra E e e Ae sta eE S E e E 8 82 PROMPT ioesensntensnsan te n ea aaea ea ai r Ee e a ER A 8 83 RECOVER ies enna a N ish i a aa T a ede eai 8 85 REMARK ceii Siccediata cd cast eai aea iaa E A LA EEAS E E E E A OERE ES 8 90 A F REPFOOTER oe e a ea aeee catia ab salon Seat shah chested eE eE hagas sua chpek desea chai r eas REPHEA DER Haro tanuan aa a a aai ae T a a a a Son TENT On NDEFIN E Anna e ERRE R R A A One E ay E EE WATT AN i E E E EA ce O EO E E WHENEVER OSERROR lt 5sesvscccsesveiesodii ec Gd oslo ciel blac aaan nan Biles ees WHENEVER SOLERIROR cssccissscstscssvcssusisesiocsss oss saloveicstios Liao so ons ssehdusnsacena T COPY Command Messages and Codes Release 8 1 5 Enhancements SQL Plus Limits SQL Command List Security SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases Glossary Index Preface The SQL Plus pronounced sequel plus User s Guide and Reference introduces the SQL Plus program and its uses It also provides a detailed description of each SO
43. Guide and Reference Getting Started Table 2 1 SQL Plus Special Keys and their Functions SQL Plus Key Name Keyboard Key Name Function Interrupt Exit SQL Plus and return to the host operating system Starting SQL Plus Now that you have identified important keys on your keyboard you are ready to start SOL Plus Example 2 1 Starting SQL Plus This example shows you how to start SQL Plus Follow the steps shown 1 Make sure that Oracle has been installed on your computer 2 Turn on your computer if it is off and log on to the host operating system if required If you are already using your computer you need not log off or reset it Simply exit from the program you are using if any You should see one or more characters at the left side of the screen This is the operating system s command prompt which signals that the operating system is ready to accept a command In this Guide the operating system s prompt will be represented by a dollar sign Your computer s operating system prompt may be different 3 Enter the command SQLPLUS and press Return This is an operating system command that starts SQL Plus Note Some operating systems expect you to enter commands in lowercase letters If your system expects lowercase enter the SQLPLUS command in lowercase SQLPLUS Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 3 Getting Started SQL Plus displays its version number the date and copyr
44. If a SQL Plus command or more than one SQL statement or PL SQL block is loaded into the SQL buffer from an operating system file an error occurs when the RUN or slash command is used to execute the buffer The GET command can be used to load files created with the SAVE command See the SAVE command in this chapter for more information Command Reference 8 71 GET Example To load a file called YEARENDRPT with the extension SQL into the buffer enter SQL gt GET YEARENDRPT 8 72 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference HELP HELP Purpose Accesses the SQL Plus help system Syntax HELP topic Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause topic Represents a SQL Plus help topic for example COLUMN Enter HELP without topic to get help on the help system Usage Notes You can only enter one topic after HELP You can abbreviate the topic for example COL for COLUMN However if you enter only an abbreviated topic and the abbreviation is ambiguous SQL Plus displays help for all topics that match the abbreviation For example if you enter SQL gt HELP EX SQL Plus displays the syntax for the EXECUTE command followed by the syntax for the EXIT command If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator Example To see a list of SOL Plus commands enter SQL gt HELP INDEX
45. MI 9999MI Displays after a negative value For a positive value a trailing space is displayed S S9999 Returns for positive values and for negative values in this position PR 9999PR Displays a negative value in lt angle brackets gt For a positive value a leading and trailing space is displayed D 99D99 Displays the decimal character in this position separating the integral and fractional parts of a number 9G999 Displays the group separator in this position C C999 Displays the ISO currency symbol in this position L999 Displays the local currency symbol in this position comma 9 999 Displays a comma in this position period 99 99 Displays a period decimal point in this position separating the integral and fractional parts of a number Vv 999V99 Multiplies value by 10 where n is the number of 9 s after the V EEEE 9 999EEE Displays value in scientific notation format must contain exactly four E s RNorrn RN Displays upper or lowercase Roman numerals Value can be an integer between 1 and 3999 Command Reference 8 35 COLUMN Table 8 1 Number Formats Element Example s Description DATE DATE Displays value as a date in MM DD YY format used to format NUMBER columns that represent Julian dates The MI and PR format elements can only appear in the last position of a number format model The S format element can only appear in the first or last position If a number format
46. Manipulation Language DML The category of SQL statements that query and update the database data Common DML statements are SELECT INSERT UPDATE and DELETE Occasionally DCL statements are grouped with DML statements data security The mechanisms that control the access and use of the database at the object level For example data security includes access to a specific schema object and the specific types of actions allowed for each user on the object for example user SCOTT can issue SELECT and INSERT statements but not DELETE statements using the EMP table It also includes the actions if any that are audited for each schema object datatype 1 A standard form of data The Oracle datatypes are CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 NVARCHAR2 DATE NUMBER LONG CLOB NCLOB RAW and LONG RAW however the Oracle database server recognizes and converts other standard datatypes 2 A named set of fixed attributes that can be associated with an item as a property Data typing provides a way to define the behavior of data DATE datatype A standard Oracle datatype used to store date and time data Standard date format is DD MMM YY as in 23 NOV 98 A DATE column may contain a date and time between January 1 4712 BC to December 31 4712 AD DBA See database administrator DBA DCL See Data Control Language DCL DDL See Data Definition Language DDL default A clause or option value that SQL Plus uses if you do not specify an a
47. NUMBER_COL had a single ampersand in front of it If you were to add three more functions using a single ampersand before each to the command file SQL Plus would prompt you a total of four times for the value of the number column You can avoid being re prompted for the group and number columns by adding a second ampersand in front of each GROUP_COL and NUMBER_COL in STATS SQL Plus automatically DEFINEs any substitution variable preceded by two ampersands but does not DEFINE those preceded by only one ampersand When you have DEFINEd a variable SQL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable Example 3 13 Using Double Ampersands To expand the command file STATS using double ampersands and then run the file first suppress the display of each line before and after substitution SQL gt SET VERIFY OFF Now retrieve and edit STATS by entering the following commands SQL gt GET STATS 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM 3 FRO amp TABLE 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM Manipulating Commands 3 23 Writing Interactive Commands 3 24 SQL gt APPEND 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM SQL gt C amp amp amp 2 MAX
48. ORDER BY DEPTNO The asterisk indicates that line 4 is the current line Command Reference 8 77 LIST To list the second line only enter SQL gt LIST 2 You will then see this 2 FROM E To list the current line now line 2 to the last line enter SQL gt LIST LAST You will then see this 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO 8 78 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PASSWORD PASSWORD Purpose Allows you to change a password without echoing the password on an input device Syntax PASSW ORD username Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term username Specifies the user If you do not specify a username username defaults to the current user Usage Notes To change the password of another user you must have been granted the appropriate privilege For more information about changing your password see the CONNECT command in this chapter Example Suppose you are logged on as scott tiger and want to change the password to tigertiger SQL gt passw Changing password for scott Old password tiger New password tigertiger Retype new password tigertiger Password changed Command Reference 8 79 PASSWORD Suppose you are logged on as a DBA and want to change the password for user usera currently identified by passa to passusera SQL gt passw u
49. PRI NT variable Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term variable Represents the names of the bind variables whose values you wish to display Enter PRINT with no variables to print all bind variables Usage Notes Bind variables are created using the VARIABLE command For more information and examples see the VARIABLE command in this chapter You can control the formatting of the PRINT output just as you would query output For more information see the formatting techniques described in Chapter 4 To automatically display bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command use the AUTOPRINT clause of the SET command For more information see the SET command in this chapter Example The following example illustrates a PRINT command SQL gt VARIABLE n NUMBER SQL gt BEGIN 2 in 1 3 END SQL gt PRINT n 8 82 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PROMPT PROMPT Purpose Sends the specified message or a blank line to the user s screen Syntax PRO MPT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text of the message you wish to display If you omit text PROMPT displays a blank line on the user s screen Usage Notes You can use this command in command files to give information to the user Example The following
50. PROMPT Password HIDE To display the prompt Enter weekly salary and place the reply in a NUMBER variable named SALARY with a default of 000 0 enter SQL gt ACCEPT salary NUMBER FORMAT 999 99 DEFAULT 000 0 gt PROMPT Enter weekly salary To display the prompt Enter date hired and place the reply in a DATE variable named HIRED with the format dd mm yy and a default of 01 01 94 enter SQL gt ACCEPT hired DATE FORMAT dd mm yy DEFAULT 01 01 94 gt PROMPT Enter date hired To display the prompt Enter employee lastname and place the reply ina CHAR variable named LASTNAME enter SQL gt ACCEPT lastname CHAR FORMAT A20 gt PROMPT Enter employee lastname 8 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference APPEND APPEND Purpose Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the SQL buffer Syntax A PPEND text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text you wish to append If you wish to separate text from the preceding characters with a space enter two spaces between APPEND and text To APPEND text that ends with a semicolon end the command with two semicolons SQL Plus interprets a single semicolon as an optional command terminator Examples To append a space and the column name DEPT to the second line
51. Plus HOST command followed by your host operating system s file listing command SQL gt HOST your_host s_file_listing_command You can use the same method to save a PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Creating a Command File by Using INPUT and SAVE If you use INPUT to enter your commands you can enter SQL Plus commands as well as one or more SQL commands or PL SQL blocks into the buffer You must enter the SQL Plus commands first and the SQL command s or PL SQL block s last just as you would if you were entering the commands directly to the command prompt You can also store a set of SQL Plus commands you plan to use with many different queries by themselves in a command file Example 3 7 Saving Commands Using INPUT and SAVE Suppose you have composed a query to display a list of salespeople and their commissions You plan to run it once a month to keep track of how well each employee is doing To compose and save the query using INPUT you must first clear the buffer SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER Manipulating Commands 3 9 Saving Commands for Later Use Next use INPUT to enter the command be sure not to type a semicolon at the end of the command SQL gt INPUT 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SA
52. Plus user only those privileges associated with the roles enabled when they started SQL Plus For more information about the creation and usage of user roles see your Oracle8i SQL Reference and Oracle8i Administrator s Guide Disabling Roles To disable a role for a given user insert a row in PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE containing the user s username in the Userid column ROLES in the Attribute column and the role name in the Char_Value column Note When you enter PUBLIC or for the Userid column you disable the role for all users You should only use or PUBLIC for roles which are granted to PUBLIC If you try to disable a role that has not been granted to a user none of the roles for that user are disabled The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR DATE VALUE VALUE VALUE SOL Plus SCOTT ROLES ROLE1 SOL Plus PUBLIC ROLES ROLE2 During login these table rows are translated into the command SET ROLE ALL EXCEPT ROLE1 ROLE2 To ensure that the user does not use the SET ROLE command to change their roles after login you can disable the SET ROLE command See Disabling SET ROLE earlier in this appendix To reenable roles delete the row containing the restriction Security E 7 Roles Roles To provide for the security of your
53. Receiving a Return Coders n ieni ities bitsy AE E tee A E elnalelide 7 4 Getting Help erer ien A e hells a a aE AE N a 7 5 vii viii Command Reference SQL Plus Command SUMM TY neos e E aE n ea iie E a E 8 2 Mat SIS 1 on n e a e e E N a a a a 8 6 double att sign scsi insis iie i ee halite Eaa E EEr eea i NERES 8 8 ACET D EEEE EEEE A EE EEEE E EA E 8 10 ACCEPT suan pa a aor a paap a tas rrei a ea E E A a E 8 11 APPEND oera itachi E Ra hove E T hee ee aes a S A i ool 8 13 ARCHIVELOG i052 e Ee E E En AAE EE eA EA e e AE E a TTE 8 15 ATIRIBUTE sa a a EE E T E E E EEA R 8 19 BREAK aenor omeen aA Deadlines As atin Dade inoue ed E ER E N E deeds 8 21 BEDE iria inaani edie eaa aa a esa thn su Ee aS E AA A E ER SEE 8 26 CHANGE sinsin e as china ines iiss eanais Aist a evii Taa Eais 8 27 CLEAR iers E e T EE E E E E tetera 8 30 GCOLUMN riere tiin AGA AH ees hos e thts REC esa N a E E eto Asli E RS 8 32 COMPUTE oes te n E Ea AEE Ora eae E EE A EEA EE E NE SE 8 43 CONNECT nnyonpysponnea ni esege eaa a ae a Ee a e a rE R N 8 49 COPY sess ccevestt tees a n a cats eas aa SSE AAA A eine Ste late as ENERE 8 51 DEFINE iiine ra a ge R ced EA a rI a cocl st duces E SERA R ER URE 8 54 DECi a L E EE A T EER E ERE E E AE R 8 56 DESCRIBE Zooe aa a a a a a a a e assets Seas 8 58 DISCONNECT siisii EES Howe E I A E ernia E stones 8 65 EDED KEE EE EE E ERE 8 66 EXECUTE prane a e aE anes gine a Vaa r E E Ei aare eaaa ar Ea a EEE 8 68 EX 18 EREE
54. Right aligns the following CHAR value Example 4 17 Placing a Top and Bottom Title on a Page To put titles at the top and bottom of each page of a report enter SQL gt TTITLE CENTER gt ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SQL gt BTITLE CENTER COMPAI Now run the current query SQL gt Y CONFIDENTIAL SQL Plus displays the following output ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLEN 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 4 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 4 18 Placing a Header on a Report To put a report header on a separate page and to center it enter SQL gt REPHEADER PAGE CENTER ACME WIDGET Now run the current query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output on page one ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT ACME WIDGE COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL and the following output on page two AC WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250
55. SAL 5 FRO P 6 WHERE EMPNO amp ENUMBER 7 SQL gt SAVE PROMPT2 Created file PROMPT2 Next run the command file SQL Plus prompts for the value of ENUMBER using the text you specified with PROMPT and ACCEPT SQL gt START PROMPT2 Enter a valid employee number For example 7123 7456 7890 Emp No Try entering characters instead of numbers to the prompt for Emp No Emp No ONE ONE is not a valid number Emp No Since you specified NUMBER after the variable name in the ACCEPT command SQL Plus will not accept a non numeric value Now enter a number Emp No 7521 old 3 WHERE EMPNO amp E ER new 3 WHERE EMPNO 7521 Manipulating Commands 3 29 Using Bind Variables SQL Plus displays the following output ENAME MGR JOB SALARY WARD 7698 SALESMAN 1 250 Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input If you want to display a message on the user s screen and then have the user enter Return after reading the message use the SQL Plus command PAUSE For example you might include the following lines in a command file PROMPT Before continuing make sure you have your account card PAUSE Press RETURN to continue Clearing the Screen If you want to clear the screen before displaying a report or at any other time include the SQL Plus CLEAR command with its SCREEN clause at the appro
56. SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT TRUNCATED SQL gt SET LINESIZE 20 SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do 3 DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B 4 END cir If there is nothing shall we continue wi SHIFTINOUT To enable the display of shift characters enter SQL gt SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE SQL gt SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP 8 120 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET The following output results ENAME JOB JJOO AABBCC AA abc DDEE e where shift character uppercase multibyte character lowercase singlebyte character Note This example illustrates that the columns are aligned correctly The data used in this example is an illustration only and does not represent real data SQLBLANKLINES To preserve blank lines in a SQL statement enter SQL gt SET SOLBLANKLINES ON SQ gt SELECT FRO DUAL YH OB WD r The following output results SQLCONTINUE To set the SQL Plus command continuation prompt to an exclamation point followed by a space enter SQL gt SET SQLCONTINUE Command Reference 8 121 SET SQL Plus will prompt for continuation as follows SQL gt ITLE YEARLY INCOME RIGHT SQL PNO SKIP 2 CENTER PC DIVISION SQL gt SUFFIX
57. SOL Plus uses in commands that refer to command files SUFFIX does not control extensions for spool files 8 112 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET TAB OFF ON Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output OFF uses spaces to format white space in the output ON uses the TAB character TAB settings are every eight characters The default value for TAB is system dependent TERM OUT OFF ON Controls the display of output generated by commands executed from a command file OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool output from a command file without seeing the output on the screen ON displays the output TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands you enter interactively TI ME OFF ON Controls the display of the current time ON displays the current time before each command prompt OFF suppresses the time display TIMI NG OFF ON Controls the display of timing statistics ON displays timing statistics on each SQL command or PL SQL block run OFF suppresses timing of each command For information about the data SET TIMING ON displays see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Refer to the TIMING command for information on timing multiple commands TRIM OUT OFF ON Determines whether SQL Plus allows trailing blanks at the end of each displayed line ON removes blanks at the end of each line improving performance especially when you access SQ
58. Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause START text Sets up a timer and makes text the name of the timer You can have more than one active timer by STARTing additional timers before STOPping the first SQL Plus nests each new timer within the preceding one The timer most recently STARTed becomes the current timer SHOW Lists the current timer s name and timing data STOP Lists the current timer s name and timing data then deletes the timer If any other timers are active the next most recently STARTed timer becomes the current timer Enter TIMING with no clauses to list the number of active timers Usage Notes You can use this data to do a performance analysis on any commands or blocks run during the period For information about the data TIMING displays see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Refer to SET TIMING ON for information on automatically displaying timing data after each SQL command or PL SQL block you run To delete all timers use the CLEAR TIMING command Command Reference 8 137 TIMING Examples To create a timer named SQL_TIMER enter SQL gt TIMING START SQL TIMER To list the current timer s title and accumulated time enter SQL gt TIMING SHOW To list the current timer s title and accumulated time and to remove the timer enter SQL gt TIMING STOP 8 138 SQL Plus User s Guide
59. To set the default command file extension to UFI enter SQL gt SET SUFFIX UFI If you then enter SO gt GET EXAMPLE SQL Plus will look for a file named EXAMPLE with an extension of UFI instead of EXAMPLE with an extension of SQL 8 122 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW SHOW Purpose Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the current SQL Plus environment Syntax SHO W option where option represents one of the following terms or clauses system_variable ALL BTI TLE ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY schema name LNO PARAMETERS parameter_name EL EASE EPF OOTER EPH EADER SGA SPOO L SQLCODE TTI TLE USER Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause system_variable Represents any system variable set by the SET command Lists the settings of all SHOW options except ERRORS in alphabetical order BTI TLE Shows the current BTITLE definition Command Reference 8 123 SHOW ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY schema name Shows the compilation errors of a stored procedure includes stored functions procedures and packages After you use the CREATE command to create a stored procedure
60. Writing Interactive Commands in Chapter 3 8 130 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference START Usage Notes The at sign and double at sign commands function similarly to START Disabling the START command in the Product User Profile also disables the and commands See the and commands in this chapter for further information on these commands The EXIT or QUIT commands in a command file terminate SQL Plus Example A file named PROMOTE with the extension SQL used to promote employees might contain the following command SELECT FROM EMP WHERE MGR amp 1 AND JOB amp 2 AND SAL gt amp 3 To run this command file enter SQL gt START PROMOTE 7280 CLERK 950 SQL Plus then executes the following command SELECT FROM EMP WHERE MGR 7280 AND JOB CLERK AND SAL gt 950 Command Reference 8 131 STARTUP STARTUP Purpose Starts an Oracle instance with several options including mounting and opening a database Syntax STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT PFILE filename MOUNT OPEN RECOVER database mount_options NOMOUNT where mount_options requires the following syntax EXCLUSIVE PARALLEL SHARED RETRY Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term and clause FORCE Shuts down the current Oracl
61. a COPY command by qualifying the table name with the username just as you would in your local database or in a query with a database link 6 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data between Tables on One Database For example to make a local copy of a table named DEPT owned by the username ADAMS on the database associated with the Net8 connect string BOSTONDB you would enter SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt CREATE EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM ADAMS DEPT Of course you could get the same result by instructing COPY to log in to the remote database as ADAMS You cannot do that however unless you know the password associated with the username ADAMS Copying Data between Tables on One Database You can copy data from one table to another in a single database local or remote To copy between tables in your local database specify your own username and password and the service name for your local database in either a FROM or a TO clause omit the other clause SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER MYDATABASE gt INSERT EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM EMP To copy between tables on a remote database include the same username password and service name in the FROM and TO clauses SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt TO SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt INSERT EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM EMP
62. a Entering and Executing Commands a Getting Help Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 1 Getting Started Getting Started To begin using SQL Plus you must first become familiar with the functions of several keys on your keyboard and understand how to start and leave SQL Plus Using the Keyboard Several keys on your keyboard have special meaning in SQL Plus Table 2 1 SQL Plus Special Keys and their Functions lists these keys See your Oracle installation and user s manual s for your operating system to learn which physical key performs each function on the keyboard commonly used with your host computer Note A SQL Plus key may perform different functions when pressed in other products or the operating system Fill in each blank in Table 2 1 with the name of the corresponding keyboard key Then locate each key on your keyboard Table 2 1 S QL Plus Special Keys and their Functions SQL Plus Key Name Keyboard Key Name Function Return End of a line of input Backspace Move cursor left one character to correct an error Pause Suspend program operation and display of output Resume ESE Resume program operation and output Pause Cancel Halt program operation return to the SQL Plus command prompt 2 2 SQL Plus User s
63. a file to the buffer with the GET command SQL gt GET file_name When appropriate to the operating system SOL Plus adds a period and the extension SQL to the filename unless you type a period at the end of the filename followed by a different extension Example 3 8 Retrieving a Command File Suppose you need to retrieve the SALES file in a later session You can retrieve the file by entering the GET command To retrieve the file SALES enter SQL gt GET SALES 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM 5 FROM EMP 6 WHERE JOB SALESMAN Manipulating Commands 3 13 Saving Commands for Later Use SQL Plus retrieves the contents of the file SALES with the extension SQL into the SQL buffer and lists it on the screen Then you can edit the command further If the file did not contain SQL Plus commands you could also execute it with the RUN command Running Command Files The START command retrieves a command file and runs the command s it contains Use START to run a command file containing SQL commands PL SQL blocks and or SQL Plus commands Follow the START command with the name of the file START file_name If the file has the extension SQL you need not add the period and the extension SQL to the filename Examp
64. and Reference TTITLE TTITLE Purpose Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page or lists the current TTITLE definition The old form of TTITLE is used if only a single word or string in quotes follows the TTITLE command For a description of the old form of TTITLE see TTITLE in Appendix F Syntax TTI TLE printspec text variable OFE ON where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n S KIP n TAB n LE F CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause These terms and clauses also apply to the BIITLE command text Represents the title text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line variable Represents a user variable or any of the following system maintained values a SQL LNO current line number a SQL PNO current page number a SQL RELEASE current Oracle release number Command Reference 8 139 TTITLE OFF ON COL n S KIP TAB n a SQL SQLCODE current error code a SQL USER current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the title You can format variable with the FORMAT clause Turns the title off suppresses its display without affecting its definition Turns the title on restores its display When you
65. appendix for information on the DOCUMENT command F 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET SPACE SET MAXDATA SET SCAN SET SPACE Purpose Sets the maximum total row width that SQL Plus can process Syntax SET MAXD ATA n Usage Notes In SQL Plus the maximum row width is unlimited Any values you set using SET MAXDATA are ignored by SQL Plus Purpose Controls scanning for the presence of substitution variables and parameters OFF suppresses processing of substitution variables and parameters ON allows normal processing Syntax SET SCAN OFF ON Usage Notes ON functions in the same manner as SET DEFINE ON Purpose Sets the number of spaces between columns in output The maximum value of n is 10 Syntax SET SPACE 1 n SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases F 5 SET TRUNCATE Usage Notes The SET SPACE 0 and SET COLSEP commands have the same effect This command is obsoleted by SET COLSEP but you can still use it for backward compatibility You may prefer to use COLSEP because the SHOW command recognizes COLSEP and does not recognize SPACE SET TRUNCATE Purpose Controls whether SQL Plus truncates or wraps a data item that is too long for the current line width Syntax SET TRU NCATE OFF ON Usage Notes ON functions in the same manner as SET WRAP OFF and vice versa You may prefer to use WRAP because the SHOW command recognizes WRAP and does not
66. clause place the expression or function reference in quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes Enter COMPUTE without clauses to list all COMPUTE definitions Usage Notes In order for the computations to occur the following conditions must all be true One or more of the expressions columns or column aliases you reference in the OF clause must also be in the SELECT command a The expression column or column alias you reference in the ON clause must occur in the SELECT command and in the most recent BREAK command a Ifyou reference either ROW or REPORT in the ON clause also reference ROW or REPORT in the most recent BREAK command To remove all COMPUTE definitions use the CLEAR COMPUTES command Examples To subtotal the salary for the clerk analyst and salesman job classifications with a compute label of TOTAL enter SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SKIP 1 SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SAL ON JOB SQL gt SELECT JOB ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB IN CLERK ANALYST SALESMAN 4 ORDER BY JOB SAL Command Reference 8 45 COMPUTE The following output results JOB ENAME SAL ANALYST SCOTT 3000 FORD 3000 KKKKKKKKK dent aera cara TOTAL 6000 CLERK SMITH 800 JAMES 950 ADAMS 1100 MILLER 1300 KIRKE RR RR a ee ae ee TOTAL 4150 SALE
67. command SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION are SQL commands see the Oracle8i SQL Reference for more information When not followed by the keywords TRANSACTION or ROLE SET is assumed to be a SOL Plus command Examples The following examples show sample uses of selected SET command variables APPINFO To display the setting of APPINFO enter SQL gt SHOW APPINFO SQL gt appinfo is ON and set to SQL Plus To change the default text enter SQL gt SET APPI This is SQL Plus SQL gt SHOW APPINFO SQL gt appinfo is ON and set to This is SQL Plus 8 114 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET To make sure that registration has taken place enter SQL gt VARIABLE MOD VARCHAR2 50 SQL gt VARIABLE ACT VARCHAR2 40 SQL gt EXECUTE DBMS _APPLICATION_INFO READ_MODULE MOD ACT SQL gt PRINT MOD MOD This is SQL Plus AUTORECOVERY To set the recovery mode to AUTOMATIC enter SQL gt SET AUTORECOVERY ON SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE CMDSEP To specify a TTITLE and format a column on the same line enter SQ SQ SQ ET CMDSEP TITLE LEFT SALARIES COLUMN SAL FORMAT 9 999 ELECT ENAME SAL FROM EMP HERE JOB CLERK vv v JUHU 2 The following output results SALA
68. command 8 79 in CONNECT command 6 2 6 3 8 49 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 6 9 8 51 in SQLPLUS command 2 4 6 4 7 2 PASSWORD command 8 49 8 79 disabling E 5 Paths creating Installation and User s Guide 8 53 PAUSE command 3 30 8 81 in LOGIN SQL 3 17 PAUSE variable 2 17 8 110 Performance of SQL statements 3 35 Performance over dial up lines 8 113 Period terminating PL SQL blocks 2 10 PLAN_TABLE table 3 36 PL SQL 1 2 2 10 blocks PL SQL 2 10 executing 8 68 formatting output in SQL Plus 8 145 listing definitions 2 17 mode inSQL Plus 2 9 within SQL commands 2 9 PLUSTRACE role 3 36 PNO clause 8 125 Pound sign 8 36 PRINT clause 8 38 PRINT command 8 82 Printing bind variables automatically 8 103 REFCURSOR variables 8 146 SPOOL command 8 129 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 PROMPT clause 3 28 8 12 Index 12 PROMPT command 3 27 8 83 customizing prompts for value 3 28 Prompts for value bypassing with parameters 3 25 customizing 3 28 through ACCEPT 3 27 through substitution variables 3 21 PUPBLD SQL E 2 Q Queries 1 2 displaying number of records retrieved 2 7 8 107 in COPY command 6 6 8 52 Query execution path including in report 8 103 Query results 1 2 displaying on screen 2 7 sending toa printer 4 36 8 129 storing ina file 4 35 8 129 QUIT command 8 69 disabling E 5 inacommand file 8 131 R Record separators printing 4 10 8 110 REC
69. command and add a summary line containing totals averages and so on by specifying the break column ina COMPUTE command Formatting Query Results 4 11 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines For example the following query without BREAK or COMPUTE commands SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO produces the following unformatted results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 LARK 2450 10 ILLER 1300 20 SMITH 800 20 ADAMS 1100 30 ALE 1600 30 JAMES 950 30 TURNER 1500 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 To make this report more useful you would use BREAK to establish DEPTNO as the break column Through BREAK you could suppress duplicate values in DEPTNO and place blank lines or begin a new page between departments You could use BREAK in conjunction with COMPUTE to calculate and print summary lines containing the total and or average maximum minimum standard deviation variance or count of rows of salary for each department and for all departments Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns The BREAK command suppresses duplicate values by default in the column or expression you name Thus to suppress the duplicate values in a column specified in an ORDER BY clause use the BREAK command in its simplest form BREAK ON break_column Note Whenever yo
70. commands Example 2 3 Entering a SQL Command In this example you will enter and execute a SQL command to display the employee number name job and salary of each employee in the sample table EMP 1 At the command prompt enter the first line of the command SQL gt SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you are done press Return to move to the next line 2 SQL Plus will display a 2 the prompt for the second line Enter the second line of the command 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 2 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands The semicolon means that this is the end of the command Press Return SQL Plus processes the command and displays the results on the screen EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 7369 SMITH CLERK 800 7499 ALLE SALESMAN 1600 7521 WARD SALESMAN 1250 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 1250 7782 CLARK MANAGER 2450 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 1500 7876 ADAMS CLERK 1100 7900 JAMES CLERK 800 7934 MILLER CLERK 1300 9 rows selected SQL gt After displaying the results and the number of rows retrieved SQL Plus displays the command prompt again If you made a mistake and therefore did not get the results shown above simply re enter the command The headings may be repeated in your output depending on the setting of a sy
71. database Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing Usage Notes If you do not enter the WHENEVER OSERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when an operating system error occurs If you do not enter the WHENEVER SQLERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when a SQL error occurs 8 150 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER OSERROR Examples The commands in the following command file cause SQL Plus to exit and COMMIT any pending changes if a failure occurs when writing to the output file SQL gt WHENE ER OSE RROR EXIT SQL gt START no_such_file OS Message No such file or directory Disconnected from Oracle8 Command Reference 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR WHENEVER SQLERROR Purpose Exits SQL Plus if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error Syntax WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SUCCESS FATLURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Directs SOL Plus to exit as soon as it detects a SQL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SQL Plus will not exit on a SQL P
72. datafile the database can remain open and mounted with the damaged datafiles offline unless the file is part of the SYSTEM tablespace Before using the RECOVER command you must have restored copies of the damaged datafile s from a previous backup Be sure you can access all archived and online redo log files dating back to when that backup was made 8 88 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER When another log file is required during recovery a prompt suggests the names of files that are needed The name is derived from the values specified in the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT You should restore copies of the archived redo log files needed for recovery to the destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST if necessary You can override the initialization parameters by setting the LOGSOURCE variable with the SET LOGSOURCE command During recovery you can accept the suggested log name by pressing return cancel recovery by entering CANCEL instead of a log name or enter AUTO at the prompt for automatic file selection without further prompting If you have enabled autorecovery that is SET AUTORECOVERY ON recovery proceeds without prompting you with filenames Status messages are displayed when each log file is applied When normal media recovery is done a completion status is returned For more information on recovery and the RECOVER command see the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide and th
73. define a top title SQL Plus automatically sets TTITLE to ON Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in this context means print position not table column n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating systems SQL Plus may instruct your printer to print bolded text on three consecutive lines instead of bold 8 140 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See the COLUMN FORMAT command for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of th
74. example at the end of this command description For information on displaying a column value in the bottom title see COLUMN OLD_VALUE For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE command later in this chapter For information on formatting and valid format models see the COLUMN FORMAT command Command Reference 8 37 COLUMN NOPRI NT PRI NT Controls the printing of the column the column heading and all the selected values NOPRINT turns the printing of the column off PRINT turns the printing of the column on NUL L text Controls the text SQL Plus displays for null values in the given column The default is a white space SET NULL controls the text displayed for all null values for all columns unless overridden for a specific column by the NULL clause of the COLUMN command When a NULL value is SELECTed a variable s type will always become CHAR so the SET NULL text can be stored in it OLD_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the variable in BIITLE commands Use OLD_VALUE to display column values in the bottom title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action OLD_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause For information on displaying a column value in the top title see COLUMN N
75. execute a PL SQL subprogram as follows SQL gt DECLARE 2 x NUMBER 100 3 BEGIN 4 FOR i IN 1 10 LOOP 5 IF MOD i 2 0 THEN i is even 6 INSERT INTO temp VALUES i x i is even 7 ELSE 8 INSERT INTO temp VALUES i x i is odd 9 END IF 10 x x 100 11 END LOOP 12 END 13 s SQL gt When you run a subprogram the SQL commands within the subprogram may behave somewhat differently than they would outside the subprogram See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for detailed information on the PL SQL language Running SQL Plus Commands You can use SQL Plus commands to manipulate SQL commands and PL SQL blocks and to format and print query results SOL Plus treats SQL Plus commands differently than SQL commands or PL SQL blocks For information on individual SQL Plus commands refer to the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To speed up command entry you can abbreviate many SQL Plus commands to one or a few letters Abbreviations for some SQL Plus commands are described along with the commands in Chapters 3 4 and 6 For abbreviations of all SQL Plus commands refer to the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 11 Entering and Executing Commands Example 2 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command This example shows how you might enter a SQL Plus command to change the format used to display the column SAL of the sample tabl
76. file a Follow the SQLPLUS command and your username with a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS SCOTT SALES SQL Plus prompts you for your password starts and runs the command file a Include your username as the first line of the file Follow the SQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus prompts for your password starts and runs the file a Include your username a slash and your password as the first line of the file Follow the SQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus starts and runs the file Nesting Command Files To run a series of command files in sequence first create a command file containing several START commands each followed by the name of a command file in the sequence Then run the command file containing the START commands For example you could include the following START commands in a command file named SALESRPT Q1SALES Q2SALES Q3SALES Q4SALES YRENDSLS S S S S S TERE Manipulating Commands 3 15 Saving Commands for Later Use Note The command may be useful in this example See the command in Chapter 8 for more information Modifying Command Files You can modify an existing command file in two ways using the EDIT command a using GET the SQL Plus editing commands and SAVE To edit an existing command file with the EDIT command follow the word EDIT with the name of the file For example to edit an ex
77. file location following the conventions of your operating system If you omit this parameter Oracle assumes the archived redo log file group is in the location specified by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_ DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 STANDBY Recovers the standby database using the control file and archived redo log files copied from the primary database The standby database must be mounted but not open DATABASE Recovers the entire database UNTIL CANCEL Specifies an incomplete cancel based recovery Recovery proceeds by prompting you with the suggested filenames of archived redo log files and recovery completes when you specify CANCEL instead of a filename UNTIL CHANGE integer Specifies an incomplete change based recovery integer is the number of the System Change Number SCN following the last change you wish to recover For example if you want to restore your database up to the transaction with an SCN of 9 you would specify UNTIL CHANGE 10 UNTIL TIME date Specifies an incomplete time based recovery Use single quotes and the following format YYYY MM DD HH24 MI SS USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE Specifies that a backup of the control file be used instead of the current control file 8 86 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER TABLESPACE tablespace Recovers a particular tablespace tablespace is the name of a tablespace in the current database You may recover up to 16 tablespaces in one stat
78. following output results DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 1300 KEKE KKK T OO iei avg 1300 KERNER ER KR Ga sum 1300 30 CLERK JAMES 1045 EERI IRERR 0 l avg 1045 SALESMAN ALIE 1760 SALESMAN MARTIN 1375 SALESMAN TURNER 1650 SALESMAN WARD 13 5 AFFERRARE O O O OO avg 1540 kkkt O O sum 7205 Command Reference 8 25 BTITLE BTITLE Purpose Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page or lists the current BTITLE definition For a description of the old form of BTITLE see Appendix F Syntax BII TLE printspec text variable OFF ON Terms and Clauses Refer to the TTITLE command for additional information on terms and clauses in the BTITLE command syntax Enter BTITLE with no clauses to list the current BTITLE definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text BTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets BTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name Examples To set a bottom title with CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT on the left and a date on the right enter SQL gt BTITLE LEFT CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT gt RIGHT 23 Nov 1998 To set a bottom title with CONFIDENTIAL in column 50 followed by six spaces and a date enter
79. gt show errors procedure procl o errors SQL gt show errors procedure scott procl Errors for PROCEDURE SCOTT PROC1 LINE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 To show whether AUTORECOVERY is enabled enter SQL gt SHOW AUTORECOVERY autorecovery ON To display the connect string for the default instance enter SQL gt SHOW INSTANCE instance local To display the location for archive logs enter SQL gt SHOW LOGSOURCE logsource usr oracle81 dbs arch To display information about the SGA enter SQL gt SHOW SGA Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes 8 126 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Purpose Shuts down a currently running Oracle instance optionally closing and dismounting a database Syntax SHUTDOWN ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL TRANSACTIONAL Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL Proceeds with the fastest possible shutdown Does not wait for calls to complete or users to disconnect Does not close or dismount the database but does shut down the instance Requires instance recovery on next startup You must use this option if a background process terminates abnormally Does not wait for current calls
80. in the destination table does not have the same datatype as the corresponding column in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the datatypes for items being selected agree with the destination You can use TO_DATE TO_ CHAR and TO_NUMBER to make conversions CPY0006 Select list has more columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table CPY0007 Select list has fewer columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table CPY0008 More column list name than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table A 2 SQL Plus User
81. is intended for use by database administrators In order to access the functionality of the commands mentioned in this chapter database administrator privileges are necessary For more information on database administration see the Oracle8i Concepts manual Database Administration 5 1 Overview Overview Special operations such as starting up or shutting down a database are performed by a database administrator DBA The DBA has certain privileges that are not assigned to normal users The commands outlined in this chapter would normally be used by a DBA For more information about security and roles in SQL Plus see Appendix E Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown An Oracle database may not always be available to all users To open or close a database or to start up or shut down an instance you must be connected as SYSOPER or SYSDBA Normal users do not have control over the current status of an Oracle database Database Startup Starting a database involves three steps 1 Starting an instance An instance controls the background processes and the allocation of memory area to access an Oracle database 2 Mounting the database Mounting the database associates it with a previously started instance 3 Opening the database Opening the database makes it available for normal database operations For more information about database STARTUP see the Oracle8i Concepts manual For information about the STARTUP comma
82. line number in the SQL buffer to change unless the command in the buffer contains an error In that case SQL Plus changes the current line number to the number of the line containing the error Example To see the SQL command s you will execute you can list the contents of the buffer SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP WHERE ENAME JAMES Enter a slash at the command prompt to execute the command in the buffer SQL gt For the above query SQL Plus displays the following output ENAME JOB JAMES CLERK 8 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ACCEPT ACCEPT Purpose Reads a line of input and stores it in a given user variable Syntax ACC EPT variable NUM BER CHAR DATE FOR MAT format DEF AU iT default PROMPT text NOPR OMPT HIDE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable NUM BER CHAR DATE FOR MAT Represents the name of the variable in which you wish to store a value If variable does not exist SOL Plus creates it Makes the datatype of variable the datatype NUMBER If the reply does not match the datatype ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again Makes the datatype of variable the datatype CHAR The maximum CHAR length limit is 240 bytes If a multi byt
83. may be opened or closed A database must be both mounted an opened to be accessed by users A database that has been mounted but not opened can be accessed by DBAs for some maintenance purposes multi threaded server Allows many user processes to share a small number of server processes minimizing the number of server processes and maximizing the utilization of available system resources NCHAR datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NCHAR datatype specifies a fixed width national character set character string and can have a maximum column size up to 2000 bytes NCLOB datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NCLOB datatype is used to store fixed width national character set character NCHAR data and can store up to 4 gigabytes of character text data Net8 Oracle s remote data access software that enables both client server and server server communications across any network Net8 supports distributed processing and distributed database capability Net8 runs over and interconnects many communications protocols Net8 is backward compatible with SQL Net version 2 Glossary 13 Glossary 14 network A group of two or more computers linked together through hardware and software to allow the sharing of data and or peripherals null A value that means a value is not applicable or the value is unknown Nulls are not equal to any specific value even to each other Comparisons with nulls are always false NULL value
84. numbers with as many digits as are required for accuracy up to a standard display width determined by the value of the NUMWIDTH variable of the SET command normally 10 If a number is larger 4 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns than the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus rounds the number up or down to the maximum number of characters allowed You can choose a different format for any NUMBER column by using a format model ina COLUMN command A format model is a representation of the way you want the numbers in the column to appear using 9 s to represent digits Changing the Default Display The COLUMN command identifies the column you want to format and the model you want to use as shown below COLUMN column_name FORMAT model Use format models to add commas dollar signs angle brackets around negative values and or leading zeros to numbers in a given column You can also round the values to a given number of decimal places display minus signs to the right of negative values instead of to the left and display values in exponential notation To use more than one format model for a single column combine the desired models in one COLUMN command see Example 4 4 For a complete list of format models and further details see the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 Example 4 4 Formatting a NUMBER Column To display SAL with a dollar sign a comma and the numeral zero instead of a blank for any zero values
85. of columns Oracle is a relational database management system Other types of database systems are called hierarchical or network database systems remark In SQL Plus a comment you can insert into a command file with the REMARK command remote computer A computer on a network other than the local computer remote database A database other than your default database which may reside on a remote computer in particular one that you reference in the CONNECT COPY and SOLPLUS commands report 1 The results of a query 2 Any output but especially output that has been formatted for quick reading in particular output from SQL Plus reserved word 1 A word that has a special meaning in a particular software or operating system 2 In SQL a set of words reserved for use in SQL statements you cannot use a reserved word as the name of a database object roles Named groups of related privileges that are granted to users or other roles rollback To discard pending changes made to the data in the current transaction using the SQL ROLLBACK command You can roll back a portion of a transaction by identifying a savepoint row 1 Synonym for record one row of data in a database table having values for one or more columns Also called tuple 2 One set of field values in the output of a query See also column schema A collection of logical structures of data or schema objects A schema is owned by a database user and
86. of the buffer make that line the current line by listing the line as follows SQL gt 2 2 FROM EMP Now enter APPEND SQL gt APPEND DEPT SQL gt 2 2 FROM EMP DEPT Notice the double space between APPEND and DEPT The first space separates APPEND from the characters to be appended the second space becomes the first appended character Command Reference 8 13 APPEND To append a semicolon to the line enter SQL gt APPEND SQL Plus appends the first semicolon to the line and interprets the second as the terminator for the APPEND command 8 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG Purpose Starts or stops automatic archiving of online redo log files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information about redo log files Syntax ARCHIVE LOG LIST STOP START NEXT ALL integer TO destination Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause LIST Requests a display that shows the range of redo log files to be archived the current log file group s sequence number and the current archive destination specified by either the optional command text or by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST If you are using both ARCHIVELOG mode and automatic archiving the display might appear like SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mod
87. or executed by SQL Plus Note You cannot enter a comment on the same line after a semicolon Using the REMARK Command Use the REMARK command on a line by itself in the command file followed by comments on the same line To continue the comments on additional lines enter additional REMARK commands Do not place a REMARK command between different lines of a single SQL command Manipulating Commands 3 11 Saving Commands for Later Use MARK Commissions report MARK to be run monthly COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN CO HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 REMARK Includes only salesmen E WE 63 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COM FROM EMP WHERE JOB SALESMAN Using Enter the SQL comment delimiters on separate lines in your command file on the same line as a SQL command or on a line in a PL SQL block The comments can span multiple lines but cannot be nested within one another Commissions report to be run monthly COLU ENAME HEADING SALESMAN COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN CO HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM FROM EMP WHERE JOB SALESMAN Includes only salesmen If you enter a SQL comment directly at
88. or PL SQL block Note For this feature a PL SQL block is regarded as one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it To turn the autocommit feature off again enter the following command SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF To confirm that AUTOCOMMIT is now set to OFF enter the following SHOW command SQL gt SHOW AUTOCOMMIT autocommit OFF For more information see the AUTOCOMMIT variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 Stopping a Command while it is Running Suppose you have displayed the first page of a 50 page report and decide you do not need to see the rest of it Press Cancel Refer to Table 2 1 at the beginning of this chapter to see how Cancel is labelled on your keyboard SQL Plus will stop the display and return to the command prompt Note Pressing Cancel will not stop the printing of a file that you have sent to a printer with the OUT clause of the SQL Plus SPOOL command You will learn about printing query results in Chapter 4 You can stop the printing of a file through your operating system For more information see your operating system s installation and user s manual Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 15 Getting Help Collecting Timing Statistics on Commands You Run Use the SQL Plus command TIMING to collect and display data on the amount of computer resources used to run one or more commands or blocks TIMING collects data for an el
89. or SQL Plus commands An EXIT or QUIT command used in a command file terminates SQL Plus The command functions similarly to START If the START command is disabled this will also disable the command For more information see the START command later in this chapter SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR 8 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference double at sign See the SQLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information Example Suppose that you have the following command file named PRINTRPT EMPRPT WKRPT SELECT FROM E p When you START PRINTRPT and it reaches the command it looks for the command file named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the command file named WKRPT in the same path as PRINTRPT and runs it Command Reference 8 9 slash slash Purpose Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer Syntax Usage Notes You can enter a slash at the command prompt or at a line number prompt of a multi line command The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the buffer on your screen Executing a SQL command or PL SQL block using the slash command will not cause the current
90. references a stored procedure you can use the EXECUTE command EXECUTE runs the PL SQL statement that you enter immediately after the command For example SQL gt EXECUTE ID EMP_MANAGEMENT GET_ID BLAKE For more information about the EXECUTE command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 9 Entering and Executing Commands The SQL Buffer The area where SQL Plus stores your most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block is called the SQL buffer The command or block remains there until you enter another Thus if you want to edit or re run the current SQL command or PL SQL block you may do so without re entering it For more information about editing or re running a command or block stored in the buffer see the section Running Command Files in Chapter 3 SQL Plus does not store the semicolon or the slash you type to execute a command in the SQL buffer Note SQOL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer Executing the Current SQL Command or PL SQL Block from the Command Prompt You can run or re run the current SQL command or PL SQL block by entering the RUN command or the slash command at the command prompt The RUN command lists the SQL command or PL SQL block in the buffer before executing the command or block the slash command simply runs the SQL command or PL SQL block Running PL SQL Blocks You
91. s Guide and Reference CPY0009 Fewer column list name than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table COPY Command Messages and Codes A 3 A 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference B Release 8 1 5 Enhancements SQL Plus release 8 1 5 provides a number of enhancements over previous releases of SQL Plus This appendix describes the enhancements for SQL Plus release 8 1 5 Release 8 1 5 Enhancements B 1 SQL Plus Release 8 1 5 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 5 Enhancements To fully exploit SQL Plus Release 8 1 5 you need Oracle8i SQL Plus release 8 1 5 gives you the following capabilities There is anew command named STARTUP The STARTUP command starts an Oracle instance with the options to mount and open a database There is anew command named SHUTDOWN The SHUTDOWN command shuts down an Oracle instance that is currently running It also optionally closes and dismounts a database There is anew command named RECOVER The RECOVER command performs media recovery on tablespaces datafiles or the entire databse There is anew command named ARCHIVE LOG The ARCHIVE LOG command allows redo log files to be
92. statements or commands are called expressions predicates or clauses See also SQL statement string Any sequence of words or characters on a line substitution variable In SQL Plus a variable name or numeral preceded by one or two ampersands amp Substitution variables are used in a command file to represent values to be provided when the command file is run subtotal In a report a total of values in a number column taken over a group of rows that have the same value in a break field See also summary summary Summaries or summary columns are used to compute subtotals grand totals running totals and other summarizations of the data in a report summary line A line in a report containing totals averages maximums or other computed values You create summary lines through the BREAK and COMPUTE commands syntax The orderly system by which commands qualifiers and parameters are combined to form valid command strings Glossary 21 Glossary 22 SYS username See also SYSTEM username SYSDBA Privilege that contains all system privileges with the ADMIN OPTION and the SYSOPER system privilege See also SYSOPER SYSOPER Privilege that allows a DBA to perform operations such as STARTUP SHUTDOWN ARCHIVE LOG and RECOVER See also SYSDBA system administrator A person responsible for operation and maintenance of the operating system of a computer system editor The text editor provided by the operating syst
93. the command prompt SQL Plus does not store the comment in the buffer Using You can use ANSI ISO style comments within SQL statements PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands Since there is no ending delimiter the comment cannot span multiple lines For PL SQL and SQL enter the comment after a command ona line or on a line by itself Commissions report to be run monthly DECLARE block for reporting monthly sales 3 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use For SQL Plus commands you can only include style comments if they are on a line by themselves For example these comments are legal set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET LONG 777 set the heading for ENAME to be SALESMAN COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN These comments are illegal SET LONG 777 set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET set maximum width for LONG to 777 LONG 777 If you enter the following SQL Plus command SQL Plus interprets it as a comment and does not execute the command SET LONG 777 Retrieving Command Files If you want to place the contents of a command file in the buffer you must retrieve the command from the file in which it is stored You can retrieve a command file using the SQL Plus command GET Just as you can save a query from the buffer to a file with the SAVE command you can retrieve a query from
94. the label to be printed for the computed value in the COMPUTE command The maximum length of a COMPUTE label is 500 characters LGWR See Log Writer LGWR local database The database that SQL Plus connects to when you start SQL Plus ordinarily a database on your host computer Also called a default database See also remote database log in or log on To perform a sequence of actions at a terminal that establishes a user s communication with the operating system and sets up default characteristics for the user s terminal session log off or log out To terminate interactive communication with the operating system and end a terminal session Log Writer LGWR A background process used by an Oracle instance LGWR writes redo log entries to disk Redo log data is generated in the redo log buffer of the system global area As transactions commit and the log buffer fills LGWR writes redo log entries into an online redo log file logon string A user specified command line used to run an application that is connected to either a local or remote database The logon string either explicitly includes a connect string or implicitly uses a default connect string LONG datatype One of the standard Oracle datatypes A LONG column can contain any printable characters such as A 3 amp or a blank and can have any length from 0 to 2 gigabytes mounted database A database associated with an Oracle instance The database
95. the results of SQL Plus operations other than increasing efficiency AUTO COMMIT OFF ON IMM EDIATE n Controls when Oracle commits pending changes to the database ON commits pending changes to the database after Oracle executes each successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE command or PL SQL block OFF suppresses automatic committing so that you must commit changes manually for example with the SQL command COMMIT IMMEDIATE functions in the same manner as the ON option n 8 102 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET commits pending changes to the database after Oracle executes n successful SOL INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks n cannot be less than zero or greater than 2 000 000 000 The statement counter is reset to zero after successful completion of a n INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks acommit a arollback a aSET AUTOCOMMIT command Note For this feature a PL SQL block is considered one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it AUTOP RINT OFF ON Sets the automatic PRINTing of bind variables ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus automatically displays bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command For more information about displaying bind variables see the PRINT command in this chapter AUTORECOVERY ON OFF ON sets the RECOVER command to automatically apply the default filena
96. use EDIT to create the file from scratch using a host system text editor Because SQL Plus commands are not stored in the buffer you must use one of the latter two methods to save SQL Plus commands Creating a Command File by Saving the Buffer Contents To save the current SQL command or PL SQL block for later use enter the SAVE command Follow the command with a file name SQL gt SAVE file_name SQL Plus adds the extension SQL to the filename to identify it as a SQL query file If you wish to save the command or block under a name with a different file extension type a period at the end of the filename followed by the extension you wish to use Note that within SQL Plus you separate the extension from the filename with a period Your operating system may use a different character or a space to separate the filename and the extension 3 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use Example 3 6 Saving the Current Command First LIST the buffer contents to see your current command SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP E 3 WHERE DEPTNO 10 4 ORDER BY SAL DESC If the query shown is not in your buffer re enter the query now Next enter the SAVE command followed by the filename DEPTINFO SQL gt SAVE DEPTINFO Created file DEPTINFO You can verify that the command file DEPTINFO exists by entering the SQL
97. you want to add begins with a blank separate the word APPEND from the first character of the text by two blanks one to separate APPEND from the text and one to go into the buffer with the text Example 3 5 Appending Text to a Line To append a space and the clause DESC to line 4 of the current query first list line 4 SQL gt LIST 4 4 ORDER BY SAL Next enter the following command be sure to type two spaces between APPEND and DESC SQL gt APPEND DESC 4 ORDER BY SAL DESC Use RUN to verify and re run the query 3 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Commands Deleting Lines To delete lines in the buffer use the DEL command 1 Use the LIST command or just the line numbers to list the lines you want to delete 2 Enter DEL with an optional clause Suppose you want to delete the current line to the last line inclusive Use the DEL command as shown below SQL gt DEL LAST DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line For more information see the DELETE command in Chapter 8 Editing Commands with a System Editor Your computer s host operating system has one or more text editors that you can use to create and edit host system files Text editors perform the same general functions as the SQL Plus editing commands but you may find them more familiar You can run your host operating system s default text editor without leaving SQL Plus by entering th
98. 00 30 TURNER 1500 0 To change the character used to underline each column heading set the UNDERLINE variable of the SET command to the desired character Formatting Query Results 4 3 Formatting Columns Example 4 3 Setting the Underline Character To change the character used to underline headings to an equal sign and rerun the query enter the following commands SQL gt SET UNDERLINE SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following results Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 30 MARTIN 1250 1400 30 TURNER 1500 0 Now change the underline character back to a dash SQL gt SET UNDERLINE Note You must enclose the dash in quotation marks otherwise SQL Plus interprets the dash as a hyphen indicating that you wish to continue the command on another line Formatting NUMBER Columns When displaying NUMBER columns you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command The sections below describe the default display and how you can alter the default with the COLUMN command Default Display A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus normally displays
99. 1 1250 1400 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 7839 01 MAY 81 2850 30 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 09 JUN 81 2450 30 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 09 DEC 82 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17 NOV 81 5000 10 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 7698 08 SEP 81 1500 0 30 7876 ADAMS CLERK 7788 12 JAN 83 1100 20 7900 JAMES CLERK 7698 03 DEC 81 950 30 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03 DEC 81 3000 20 7934 MILLER CLERK 7782 23 JAN 82 1300 10 Figure 1 2 DEPT Table DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 1 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference What You Need to Run SQL Plus What You Need to Run SQL Plus To run SQL Plus you need hardware software operating system specific information a username and password and access to one or more tables Hardware and Software Oracle and SQL Plus can run on many different kinds of computers Your computer s operating system manages the computer s resources and mediates between the computer hardware and programs such as SQL Plus Different computers use different operating systems For information about your computer s operating system see the documentation provided with the computer Before you can begin using SQL Plus both Oracle and SQL Plus must be installed on your computer Note that in order to take full advantage of the enhancements in SQL Plus release 8 1 5 you must have Oracle8i For a list of SQL Plus release 8 1 5 enhancements see A
100. 11 HIDE clause 8 12 NOPROMPT clause 8 12 NUMBER clause 3 29 PROMPT clause 3 28 8 12 Access denying and granting E 2 ALIAS clause 8 33 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 19 ALL clause 8 123 Index 1 ALTER command disabling E 6 Ampersands amp in parameters 3 25 8 6 8 130 substitution variables 3 20 ANALYZE command disabling E 6 APPEND clause in COPY command 6 7 8 52 inSAVE command 3 16 8 98 APPEND command 3 2 3 6 8 13 APPINFO variable 8 101 ARCH background process 8 16 ARCHIVE LOG command 5 4 8 15 ARCHIVE LOG mode 5 4 Arguments in START command 3 25 8 130 ARRAYSIZE variable 8 102 relationship to COPY command 6 8 8 53 Attribute display characteristics 8 19 ATTRIBUTE command 8 19 ALIAS clause 8 19 and CLEAR COLUMN command 8 20 CLEAR clause 8 20 clearing columns 8 30 8 33 controlling an attribute s display charcteristics 8 20 entering multiple 8 20 FORMAT clause 8 20 LIKE clause 8 20 listing all attributes display characteristics 8 19 listing an attribute s display characteristics 8 19 OFF clause 8 20 ON clause 8 20 restoring column display attributes 8 20 suppressing column display attributes 8 20 AUDIT command disabling E 6 AUTOCOMMIT variable 2 14 8 102 AUTOMATIC clause 8 85 AUTOPRINT variable 8 103 AUTORECOVERY variable 8 103 AUTOTRACE variable 3 35 AVG function 4 17 Index 2 Background processes startup after abnormal termination 8 127 Batch mode 3
101. 130 command file 3 14 8 130 disabling E 5 passing parameters to a command file 3 25 8 130 similar to at sign command 3 15 8 7 8 131 similar to double at sign command 8 8 8 131 Starting SQL Plus 2 3 shortcuts 2 4 STARTUP command 8 132 EXCLUSIVE clause 8 133 FORCE clause 8 132 MOUNT clause 8 132 NOMOUNT clause 8 133 OPEN clause 8 132 PARALLEL clause 8 133 PFILE clause 8 132 RECOVER clause 8 133 RESTRICT clause 8 132 RETRY clause 8 133 SHARED clause 8 133 specifying a database 8 133 Statistics 3 35 STD function 4 17 STOP clause 8 16 8 137 STORE command 3 18 8 136 SET clause 8 136 Stored functions 3 32 Stored procedures creating 2 9 Substitution variables 3 20 appending characters immediately after 3 23 avoiding unnecessary prompts for value 3 23 concatenation character 8 105 DEFINE command 3 23 8 54 prefixing 8 105 restrictions 3 25 single and double ampersands 3 23 system variables used with 3 25 undefined 3 21 where and how to use 3 21 SUFFIX variable 8 112 used with at sign command 8 6 used with EDIT command 8 66 used with GET command 8 71 used with SAVE command 8 98 used with START command 8 130 SUM function 4 17 Summary lines computing and printing 4 16 8 43 computing and printing at ends of reports 4 20 computing same type on different columns 4 21 printing grand and sub summaries totals 4 21 printing multiple on same break column 4
102. 16 packages A method of encapsulating and storing related procedures functions and other package constructs together as a unit in the database While packages provide the database administrator or application developer organizational benefits they also offer increased functionality and database performance page A screen of displayed data or a sheet of printed data in a report parallel server Some hardware architectures for example loosely coupled processors allow multiple computers to share access to data software or peripheral devices With systems that have the parallel server option Oracle can take advantage of such hardware platforms by running multiple database instances that share a single physical database In appropriate applications the Oracle Parallel Server allows access to a single database by the users on multiple machines with increased database performance parameter A substitution variable consisting of an ampersand followed by a numeral amp 1 amp 2 and so on You use parameters in a command file and pass values into them through the arguments of the START command password A secondary identification word or string of alphanumeric characters associated with a username A password is used for data security and known only to its owner Passwords are entered in conjunction with an operating system login ID Oracle username or account name in order to connect to an operating system or software applic
103. 17 8 70 BEGIN command 2 10 disabling E 6 Bind variables 3 30 creating 8 144 displaying 8 82 displaying automatically 8 103 8 145 in PL SQL blocks 8 145 in SQL statements 8 145 in the COPY command 8 145 REFCURSOR 3 32 Blank line in PL SQL blocks 2 10 inSQL commands 2 8 Blank lines preserving in SQL commands 8 111 Blocks PL SQL 1 2 continuing 2 10 editing in buffer 3 2 editing with host system editor 3 7 8 66 entering and executing 2 10 listing current in buffer 3 3 run from SQL buffer 2 10 saving current 3 8 8 98 setting character used toend 8 104 stored in SQL buffer 2 10 storing in command files 3 8 timing statistics 8 113 within SQL commands 2 9 BLOCKTERMINATOR variable 8 104 BOLD clause 8 94 8 140 Break columns 4 11 8 21 inserting space when value changes 4 13 specifying multiple 4 14 suppressing duplicate values in 4 12 BREAK command 4 11 8 21 and SQL ORDER BY clause 4 11 4 12 4 14 8 22 clearing BREAKS 4 16 displaying column values in titles 4 30 DUPLICATES clause 8 24 inserting space after every row 4 14 inserting space when break column changes 4 13 listing current break definition 4 16 8 24 ON column clause 4 12 8 21 ON expr clause 8 23 ON REPORT clause 4 20 8 23 ON ROW clause 4 14 8 23 printing grand and sub summaries 4 21 printing summary lines at ends of reports 4 20 removing definition 8 30 SKIP clause 4 14 8 23 SKIP PAGE clause 4 13 4 14 8
104. 24 specifying multiple break columns 4 14 8 22 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 suppressing duplicate values 4 12 used in conjunction with COMPUTE 4 16 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 45 used in conjunction with SET COLSEP 8 105 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 146 Break definition listing current 4 16 8 24 removing current 4 16 8 30 BREAKS clause 4 16 8 30 BTITLE clause 8 124 BTITLE command 4 23 8 26 aligning title elements 8 140 BOLD clause 8 140 CENTER clause 8 140 COL clause 8 140 FORMAT clause 8 141 indenting titles 8 140 LEFT clause 8 140 most often used clauses 4 23 OFF clause 8 140 old form F 2 printing blank lines before bottom title 4 27 referencing column value variable 8 38 RIGHT clause 8 140 SKIP clause 8 140 suppressing current definition 8 140 TAB clause 8 140 TTITLE command 8 26 Buffer 2 10 appending text to a line in 3 6 8 13 delete a single line 3 2 delete the current line 3 2 delete the last line 3 2 deleting a range of lines 3 2 8 56 deleting a single line 8 56 deleting alllines 3 2 8 30 8 56 deleting lines from 3 7 8 56 deleting the current line 8 56 deleting the last line 8 56 executing contents 2 10 8 10 8 97 inserting new line in 3 5 8 75 listing a range of lines 3 3 8 77 listing a single line 3 2 8 77 listing all lines 3 2 8 77 listing contents 3 3 8 77 listing the current line 3 2 8 77 listing the last line 3 3
105. 4 36 Creating the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 Cursor Variables 8 145 D Database mounting 8 132 opening 8 132 Database administrator 1 7 5 2 Database changes saving automatically 2 14 8 102 DATABASE clause 8 86 Database files recovering 8 85 Database name at startup 8 132 Databases and RECOVERY command 8 85 connecting to default 6 2 8 49 connecting to remote 6 3 8 49 copying data between 6 4 8 51 copying data between tables ona single 6 9 disconnecting without leaving SQL Plus 6 2 8 65 mounting 5 3 opening 5 3 recovering 5 5 8 85 shutting down 5 2 5 3 starting 5 2 DATAFILE clause 8 87 DATE clause 8 11 DATE columns changing format 4 7 8 34 8 41 default format 4 6 Date storing current in variable for titles 4 32 8 37 8 40 DB2 8 105 DBA mode 8 132 DBA privilege 8 132 DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package 8 101 DECLARE command disabling E 6 DECLARE command PL SQL 2 10 DEFAULT clause 8 12 F 2 DEFINE command 3 19 8 54 and host system editor 3 7 8 55 CHAR values 8 54 substitution variables 3 23 8 54 DEFINE variable 3 25 8 105 DEL command 3 2 3 7 8 56 using an asterisk 3 2 8 56 DELETE command disabling E 6 DEMOBLD 1 8 DEMODROP 1 8 DEPT table 1 6 DESCRIBE command SQL Plus 2 16 8 58 net service name 8 58 PL SQL properties listed by 8 59 table properties listed by 8 58 DISABLED keyword disabling commands E 4 Disabling PL SQL commands E 6 SQ
106. 600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes Command Reference 8 135 STORE STORE Purpose Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in a host operating system file a command file Syntax STORE SET file_name ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause SET Saves the values of the system variables Refer to the SAVE command for information on the other terms and clauses in the STORE command syntax Usage Notes This command creates a command file which can be executed with the START or commands If you want to store a file under a name identical to a STORE command clause that is CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must put the name in single quotes or specify a file extension Example To store the current SQL Plus system variables in a file named DEFAULTENV with the default command file extension enter SQL gt STORE SET DEFAULTENV To append the current SQL Plus system variables to an existing file called DEFAULTENV with the extension OLD enter SQL gt STORE SET DEFAULTENV OLD APPEND 8 136 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TIMING TIMING Purpose Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s name and timing data or lists the number of active timers Syntax TIMI NG START text SHOW STOP
107. 7 Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment cccccccsssessesesssessssseseseesssesesesessseesssenseseseees 3 17 Modifying Your LOGIN File s cicscccccicceticcsescsetaciesstsstostinssscoosesaicesssvessieiniisecessisatantesveedtaies 3 17 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables ccccccsescssesesceeesesesesneteeseseeneeseeeens 3 18 Restoring the System Variables 0 cccccsssesesssesssssesesesesssssesesesesesesesesesseseseseeeseseees 3 18 Writing Interactive Commands ccc cccccccsesesesescscsesesesesescsesesescsesssesesesescssseseecseseseseseecseeea 3 19 Defining User Variables insestin ait ii pisini 3 19 Using Substitution Variables ssie a i ea i eiaa 3 20 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables cccecceceeseeseeececeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseneees 3 21 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values sssssssesssssssseesessessesrensissesnssnenresnesnseneenees 3 23 ReSUPICHONS osrin teieni a a R A a a N ete i e E e AE OE ieee 3 25 System Variables irrena enina e a oi Mir a EE a a 3 25 Passing Parameters through the START Command ccccccccccsscsceneneseseseeteeseecesesssesnenanens 3 25 Communicating with the User v sceciessccessseeevatesseveeseast arere alueina ekt i aiana 3 27 Prompting for and Accepting User Variable ccccceeseesesesssssesesesenesssesesesensneseseees 3 27 Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable cccccseccsceeesteneeseecesesesneneneneens 3 28 Sending a Message and Acce
108. AR 4 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Now restrict the width of the column LOC and tell SQL Plus to wrap whole words to additional lines when necessary SQL gt COLUMN LOC FORMAT A7 WORD_WRAPPED Finally enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT FROM DEPT SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a line of characters after every row after every department for the above example Before continuing set RECSEP to OFF to suppress the printing of record separators SQL gt SET RECSEP OFF Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines When you use an ORDER BY clause in your SQL SELECT command rows with the same value in the ordered column or expression are displayed together in your output You can make this output more useful to the user by using the SQL Plus BREAK and COMPUTE commands to create subsets of records and add space and or summary lines after each subset The column you specify in a BREAK command is called a break column By including the break column in your ORDER BY clause you create meaningful subsets of records in your output You can then add formatting to the subsets within the same BREAK
109. BREAK command 4 12 8 21 in COMPUTE command 4 16 8 44 ON expr clause in BREAK command 8 23 in COMPUTE command 8 44 ON REPORT clause in BREAK command 4 20 8 23 in COMPUTE command 4 20 8 44 ON ROW clause in BREAK command 4 14 8 23 in COMPUTE command 8 44 Online help 2 6 7 5 8 73 OPEN clause 8 132 Opening a database 8 132 Oracle Application Server 1 3 Oracle Designer 1 3 Oracle Developer 1 3 Oracle Discoverer 1 3 Oracle Enterprise Developer Suite 1 3 Oracle Express 1 4 Oracle Media Objects 1 4 Oracle Mobile Agents 1 4 Oracle Programmer 1 3 Oracle Reports 1 3 Oracle Workflow 1 3 ORDER BY clause displaying column values in titles 4 30 displaying values together in output 4 11 OUT clause 4 36 8 129 Output formatting white space in 8 113 pausing during display 2 17 8 110 query results 1 2 P PAGE clause 8 93 Page number including in titles 4 15 4 28 Pages changing length 4 33 8 110 default dimensions 4 32 matching dimensions to screen or paper size 4 33 setting dimensions 4 32 PAGESIZE variable 2 7 4 33 8 110 PAGESIZEclause in LOGIN SQL 3 17 Index 11 PARALLEL clause 8 133 PARALLEL DEGREE clause 8 87 PARALLEL DEGREE DEFAULT clause 8 87 PARALLEL INSTANCES clause 8 88 PARALLEL INSTANCES DEFAULT clause 8 88 Parameter files INIT ORA files specifying alternate 8 132 Parameters 3 25 8 6 8 130 PARAMETERS clause 8 124 Password 1 7 changing with the PASSWORD
110. COLUMN command on the break column If you repeat a function in a COMPUTE command SQL Plus issues a warning and uses the first occurrence of the function With ON REPORT and ON ROW computations the label appears in the first column listed in the SELECT statement The label can be suppressed by using a NOPRINT column first in the SELECT statement When you compute a function of the first column in the SELECT statement ON REPORT or ON ROW then the computed value appears in the first column and the label is not displayed To see the label select a dummy column first in the SELECT list OF expr column alias In the OF clause you can refer to an expression or function reference in the SELECT statement by placing the expression or function reference in double quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes ON expr column alias REPORT ROW Specifies the event SQL Plus will use as a break column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement COMPUTE prints the computed value and restarts the computation when the event occurs that is when the value 8 44 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE of the expression changes a new ROW is fetched or the end of the report is reached If multiple COMPUTE commands reference the same column in the ON clause only the last COMPUTE command applies To reference a SQL SELECT expression or function reference in an ON
111. CRIBE addr_type SQL Plus lists the following information addr_type TABLE OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHARZ2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 Command Reference 8 61 DESCRIBE To create and describe the object type addr_varray as a varray of the object type ADDRESS enter SQ gt FATE TYPE addr_varray AS VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS 2 gt C D SQ ESCRIBE addr_varray SQL Plus lists the following information addr_varray VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 GITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the table dept_emp that contains the columns DEPTNO PERSON and LOC enter SQL gt CREATE TABLE dept_emp 2 DEPTNO BER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC ER r 3 4 Si 6 SOL gt D ESCRIBE dept_emp SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type DEPTNO BER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC BER To create and describe the object type rational that contains the attributes NUMERATOR and DENOMINATOR and the METHOD rational_order enter SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE rational AS OBJECT 2 NUMERATOR UMBER 3 DENOMINATOR NUMBER 4 AP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order gt RETURN DOUBLE PRECISIO
112. CT AS SYSOPER SYSDBA The AS clause allows privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges Usage Notes CONNECT commits the current transaction to the database disconnects the current username from Oracle and reconnects with the specified username If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection into that account as that user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA For more information about user account management refer to the CREATE and ALTER USER commands and the CREATE PROFILE command in the Oracle8i SQL Reference Examples To connect across Net8 using username SCOTT and password TIGER to the database known by the Net8 alias as FLEETDB enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOTT TIGER FLEETDB To connect using username SCOTT letting SQL Plus prompt you for the password enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOTT For more information about setting up your password file refer to the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide To use a password file to connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged user named SCOTT with the password TIGER enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOIT TIGER AS SYSDBA Note that your default schema is now SYS not SCOTT 8 50 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY COPY Purpose
113. Command Files with a System Editor You can also create a command file with a host operating system text editor by entering EDIT followed by the name of the file for example SQL gt EDIT SALES Like the SAVE command EDIT adds the filename extension SQL to the name unless you type a period and a different extension at the end of the filename When you save the command file with the text editor it is saved back into the same file You must include a semicolon at the end of each SQL command and a period on a line by itself after each PL SQL block in the file You can include multiple SQL commands and PL SQL blocks When you create a command file using EDIT you can also include SQL Plus commands at the end of the file You cannot do this when you create a command file using the SAVE command because SAVE appends a slash to the end of the file This slash would cause SQL Plus to run the command file twice once upon reaching the semicolon at the end of the last SQL command or the slash after the last PL SQL block and once upon reaching the slash at the end of the file Placing Comments in Command Files You can enter comments in a command file in one of three ways a using the SQL Plus REMARK command using the SQL comment delimiters a using ANSI ISO American National Standards Institute International Standards Organization comments Anything that is identified in one of these ways as a comment is not parsed
114. DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL SQL gt ORDER BY DEPTNO JOB Now to skip a page when the value of DEPTNO changes and one line when the value of JOB changes enter the following command SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP PAGE ON JOB SKIP 1 To show that SKIP PAGE has taken effect create a TTITLE with a page number enter SQL gt TTITLE COL 35 FORMAT 9 Page SQL PNO Run the new query to see the results SQL gt Page 1 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 300 MANAGER CLARK 2450 Page 2 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 20 CLERK SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 Page 3 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 30 CLERK JAMES 950 SALESMAN ALLE 1600 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 Formatting Query Results 4 15 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Listing and Removing Break Definitions You can list your current break definition by entering the BREAK command with no clauses BREAK You can remove the current break definition by entering the CLEAR command with the BREAKS clause CLEAR BREAKS You may wish to place the command CLEAR BREAKS at the beginning of every command file to ensure that previously entered BREAK commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes If you organize the rows of a report
115. DESCRIBE Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure DISCONNECT Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current username off Oracle but does not exit SQL Plus EDIT Invokes a host operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer ECUTE Executes a single PL SQL statement EXIT Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system GET Loads a host operating system file into the SQL buffer HELP Accesses the SQL Plus help system HOST Executes a host operating system command without leaving SQL Plus INPUT Adds one or more new lines after the current line in the buffer LIST Lists one or more lines of the SQL buffer PASSWORD Allows a password to be changed without echoing the password on an input device PAUSE Displays an empty line followed by a line containing text then waits for the user to press Return or displays two empty lines and waits for the user s response PRINT Displays the current value of a bind variable PROMPT Sends the specified message or a blank line to the user s screen Command Reference 8 3 SQL Plus Command Summary Command Description ECOVER Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database REMARK Begins a comm
116. DIT Purpose Invokes a host operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer Syntax ED IT file_name ext Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause file_name ext Represents the file you wish to edit typically a command file Enter EDIT with no filename to edit the contents of the SOL buffer with the host operating system text editor Usage Notes If you omit the file extension SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If you specify a filename SQL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory If SQL Plus cannot find the file in the current working directory it creates a file with the specified name The user variable EDITOR contains the name of the text editor invoked by EDIT You can change the text editor by changing the value of _EDITOR See DEFINE for information about changing the value of a user variable If EDITOR is undefined EDIT attempts to invoke the default host operating system editor EDIT alone places the contents of the SQL buffer in a file by default named AFIEDT BUF in your current working directory and invokes the text editor on the contents of the file If the file AFIEDT BUF already exists it is overwritten with the contents of the buffer You can ch
117. E 1600 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 TURNER 1500 KKKKKKKAKKKR HH TOTAL 5600 4 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines To print a grand total or grand average grand maximum and so on in addition to subtotals or sub averages and so on include a break column and an ON REPORT clause in your BREAK command Then enter one COMPUTE command for the break column and another to compute ON REPORT BREAK ON break_column ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON REPORT Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines You can compute and print the same type of summary value on different columns To do so enter a separate COMPUTE command for each column Example 4 14 Computing the Same Type of Summary Value on Different Columns To print the total of salaries and commissions for all salesmen first enter the following COMPUTE command SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL COMM ON REPORT You do not have to enter a BREAK command the BREAK you entered in Example 4 13 is still in effect Now add COMM to the current query SQL gt 1 SELECT ENAME SAL COMM Finally run the revised query to see the results SQL gt ENAME SAL co ALLE 1600 300 WARD 1250 500 MARTIN 1250 1400 TURNER 1500 0 KKKKKKKKKK
118. E Ee AEE ENE I E SEE e E chances 1 8 Learning SQL Plus Basics Getting Started ororau Sectors Rate ci daeste Sich toad e eE EAE E EA A tastes sadam 2 2 Using the Keyboard aia ea ae ora aaa EEE cela r E aria 2 2 Starting SQL PIUS an eones eissaia a te aii an in e a E a 2 3 Shortcuts to Starting SQL PIUS Spi iiser seess asee Enie t ienes PRAEENT E DESEOS EDAR 2 4 Leaving SQL PIUS hihina ayasa wind ail biteaithaarbaa nevi iias 2 4 Entering and Executing Commands cece ce ceeeeseeeeceseseeseeseseseseseesseseeseeeseseseenenes 2 5 Ent ring Commands sissies sieves arseen aeie ia a Ra E ERKEN 2 5 Gettin LS i o vidas E E E E E A E E A E gsebetatl outa 2 6 Executing Commands kirsresrri ran i oaa E E REE EA E E A 2 6 Running SOL Comm ndsrosnisenisr inie nea e e A E a a R E A 2 6 Understanding SQL Command Syntax cc ceessescecssssensnssesesessneseseseseeenes 2 7 The SOE Buffer starenka an n goo hasten ade Re Ae en 2 10 Executing the Current SQL Command or PL SQL Block from the Command Prompt icc cus ecysc sesh ninn innir E a E a E o S 2 10 Running PL SQL BlOGKS sae eee a eetan Tae Lena EE tous Eaa Ee eaS EPE vosattnoterstontectubstettects 2 10 Running SQL Plus Commands sssiscsienm ne E E A E 2 11 Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax sssssssssssississessesteesisressetennissesnesnenessesses 2 12 Variables that Affect Running CommandS ss sssssssseesississesssesiesisstssseniesiesiestentenieseesensnesens 2 13 Saving Changes to the Datab
119. E JOB IS IN COOK BUTLER 8 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE You can replace the contents of an entire line using the line number This entry SQL gt 2 FROM EMP el causes the second line of the buffer to be replaced with FROM EMP el Note that entering a line number followed by a string will replace the line regardless of what text follows the line number For example SQL gt 2 c old new will change the second line of the buffer to be 2 c old new Command Reference 8 29 CLEAR CLEAR Purpose Resets or erases the current value or setting for the specified option Syntax CL EAR option where option represents one of the following clauses BRE AKS BUFF ER COL UMNS COMP UTES SCR EEN SOL TIMI NG Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause BRE AKS Removes the break definition set by the BREAK command BUFF ER Clears text from the buffer CLEAR BUFFER has the same effect as CLEAR SQL unless you are using multiple buffers see the SET BUFFER command in Appendix F COL UMNS Resets column display attributes set by the COLUMN command to default settings for all columns To reset display attributes for a single column use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that column COMP UTES Removes all
120. EPORT REM Each column displays the sums of salaries by job for REM one of the departments 10 20 30 SELECT JOB SUM DECODE DEPTNO 10 SAL 0 DEPARTME 10 SUM DECODE DEPTNO 20 SAL 0 DEPARTME 20 SUM DECODE DEPTNO 30 SAL 0 DEPARTME 30 SUM SAL TOTAL BY JOB FROM EMP GROUP BY JOB 8 90 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPFOOTER REPFOOTER Purpose Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition Syntax REPF OOTER PAGE printspec text variable OFF ON Terms and Clauses Refer to the REPHEADER command for additional information on terms and clauses in the REPFOOTER command syntax Enter REPFOOTER with no clauses to list the current REPFOOTER definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPFOOTER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Note If SET EMBEDDED is ON the report footer is suppressed Example To define END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report footer on a separate page and to center it enter
121. EPTNO ADAMS 7788 14 JAN 87 1100 20 JAMES 7698 03 DEC 81 950 30 MILIER 7782 23 JAN 82 1300 10 SMITH 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 Job Report 11 23 98 Job CLERK ENAME MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO ALLE 7698 20 JAN 81 1600 30 ARTIN 7698 03 DEC 81 950 30 ILLER 7782 23 JAN 82 1300 10 SMITH 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 To change the default format of DATE columns to YYYY MM DD you can enter SQL gt ALTER SESSION SET NLS_ DATI The following output results Session altered To display the change enter a SELECT statement such as SQL gt SELECT HIREDATE 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE PNO 7839 The following output results 1981 11 17 E_FORMAT YYYY MM DD See the OracleSi SQL Reference for information on the ALTER SESSION command Command Reference 8 41 COLUMN Note that in a SELECT statement some SQL calculations or functions such as TO_ CHAR may cause a column to be very wide In such cases use the FORMAT option to alter the column width 8 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE COMPUTE Purpose Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions For details on how to create summaries see Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines in Chapter 4 Syntax COMP UTE function LAB EL text OF expr column a
122. EW_VALUE For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE command later in this chapter ON OFF Controls the status of display attributes for a column OFF disables the attributes for a column without affecting the attributes definition ON reinstates the attributes WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies how SQL Plus will treat a datatype or DATE string that is too wide for a column WRAPPED wraps the string within the column bounds beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAP is enabled SQL Plus left justifies each new line skipping all leading whitespace for example returns newline characters tabs and spaces including embedded newline characters Embedded whitespace not on a line boundary is not skipped TRUNCATED truncates the string at the end of the first line of display 8 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Usage Notes You can enter any number of COLUMN commands for one or more columns All column attributes set for each column remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the column OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the COLUMN commands you enter can control a column s display attributes for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple COLUMN commands for the same column SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several COLUMN commands apply the same clause to the same column the last one entered will
123. GHT clause 4 24 4 26 8 140 SKIP clause 4 24 4 26 8 140 suppressing current definition 4 30 8 140 TAB clause 8 140 Tuning 3 35 U UNDEFINE command 3 20 8 143 and DEFINE command 8 54 NDERLINE variable 4 3 8 113 NTIL CANCEL clause 8 86 NTIL CHANGE clause 8 86 NTIL CONTROLEFILE clause 8 87 NTIL TIME clause 8 86 PDATE command disabling E 6 SER clause 8 125 ser Profile 3 17 7 4 ser variables 3 19 defining 3 19 8 54 deleting 3 20 8 143 displaying in headers and footers 8 93 displaying in titles 8 139 in ACCEPT command 3 27 8 11 listing definition of one 3 20 8 54 listing definitions of all 3 20 8 54 Username 1 7 connecting under different 6 2 8 49 in CONNECT command 6 2 6 3 8 49 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 6 9 8 51 in SQLPLUS command 2 4 6 4 7 2 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 8 86 USING clause 6 6 8 52 Gee Ge Ge cua V V SESSION virtual table 8 102 V SQLAREA virtual table 8 102 VARCHAR columns changing format 4 7 default format 4 6 8 34 VARCHAR clause VARIABLE command 8 144 VARCHAR columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 4 6 VARIABLE command 8 144 CHAR clause 8 144 CLOB clause 8 145 NCHAR clause 8 144 NCLOB clause 8 145 NUMBER clause 8 144 REFCURSOR clause 8 145 VARCHAR clause 8 144 variable clause 8 144 Variables bind variables 3 30 substitution variables 3 20 system variables 2 13 user variables 8 54 VARIANCE function
124. I a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the bottom title as an empty line followed by a line with centered text Refer to TTITLE old form in this appendix for more details COLUMN DEFAULT DOCUMENT Purpose Resets the display attributes for a given column to default values Syntax COL UMN column expr DEF AULT Usage Notes Has the same effect as COLUMN CLEAR Purpose Begins a block of documentation in a command file Syntax DOC UMENT F 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET BUFFER NEWPAGE Usage Notes For information on the current method of inserting comments in a command file refer to the section Placing Comments in Command Files under Saving Commands for Later Use in Chapter 3 and to the REMARK command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 After you type DOCUMENT and enter Return SQL Plus displays the prompt DOC gt in place of SQL gt until you end the documentation The pound character on a line by itself ends the documentation If you have set DOCUMENT to OFF SQL Plus suppresses the display of the block of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command See SET DOCUMENT later in this appendix Purpose Advances spooled output n lines beyond the beginning of the next page Syntax NEWPAGE 1 n Usage Notes Refer to the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 for information on the current method for advancing spoole
125. IGER Notice that you do not need a semicolon at the end of the command COPY is a SQL Plus command not a SQL command even though it contains a query Since most COPY commands are longer than one line you must use a hyphen optionally preceded by a space at the end of each line except the last Interpreting the Messages that COPY Displays The first three messages displayed by COPY show the values of SET command variables that affect the COPY operation The most important one is LONG which limits the length of a LONG column s value LONG is a datatype similar to CHAR If the source table contains a LONG column COPY truncates values in that column to the length specified by the system variable LONG The variable ARRAYSIZE limits the number of rows that SOL Plus fetches from the database at one time This number of rows makes up a batch The variable COPYCOMMIT sets the number of batches after which COPY commits changes to the database If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY commits changes only after all batches are copied For more information on the variables of the SET command including how to change their settings see the SET command in Chapter 8 After listing the three system variables and their values COPY tells you if a table was dropped created or updated during the copy Then COPY lists the number of rows selected inserted and committed Specifying Another User s Table You can refer to another user s table in
126. IZE command For more information see the SET command later in this chapter The description for functions and procedures contains the following information a the type of PL SQL object function or procedure a the name of the function or procedure the type of value returned for functions the argument names types whether they are input or output and default values if any Examples To describe the table EMP enter SQL gt DESCRIBE EMP SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type EMPNO NOT NULL NUMBER 4 ENAME CHAR 10 JOB JOB 9 IGR NUMBER 4 HIREDATE DATE SAL NUMBER 7 2 Col NUMBER 7 2 DEPTNO NUMBER 2 To describe a procedure called CUSTOMER_LOOKUF enter SQL gt DESCRIBE customer_lookup Command Reference 8 59 DESCRIBE SQL Plus lists the following information PROCEDURE customer_lookup Argument Name Type In Out Default CUST_ID NUMBER IN CUST_NAME VARCHAR2 OUT To create and describe the package APACK that contains the procedures aproc and bproc enter SQL gt CREATE PACKAGE apack AS 2 PROCEDURE aproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER 3 PROCEDURE bproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER 4 END apack D 5 SQL gt ESCRIBE apack SQL Plus list
127. L COMM 5 FROM EMP 6 WHERE JOB iSALESMANi 7 The zero at the end of the format model for the column COMM tells SOL Plus to display a zero instead of a blank when the value of COMM is zero for a given row Format models and the COLUMN command are described in more detail in Chapter 4 Now use the SAVE command to store your query in a file called SALES with the extension SQL SQL gt SAVE SALES Created file SALES Note that you do not type a semicolon at the end of the query if you did include a semicolon SQL Plus would attempt to run the buffer contents The SQL Plus commands in the buffer would produce an error because SQL Plus expects to find only SQL commands in the buffer You will learn how to run a command file later in this chapter To input more than one SQL command leave out the semicolons on all the SQL commands Then use APPEND to add a semicolon to all but the last command SAVE appends a slash to the end of the file automatically this slash tells SQL Plus to run the last command when you run the command file To input more than one PL SQL block enter the blocks one after another without including a period or a slash on a line between blocks Then for each block except the last list the last line of the block to make it current and use INPUT in the following form to insert a slash on a line by itself INPUT 3 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use Creating
128. L Plus command xi Audience This Guide addresses business and technical professionals who have a basic understanding of the SQL database language If you do not have any familiarity with this database tool you should refer to the Oracle8i SQL Reference If you plan to use the PL SQL database language in conjunction with SQL Plus refer to the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on using PL SQL How to Use this Guide xii Refer to the following tables for a list of topics covered by this Guide a description of each topic and the number of the chapter that covers the topic PART I Understanding SQL Plus Chapter Topic Description Number Introduction Gives an overview of SQL Plus instructions 1 on using this Guide and information on what you need to run SQL Plus Learning SQL Plus Explains how to start SQL Plus and enter 2 Basics and execute commands You learn by following step by step examples using sample tables Manipulating Also through examples helps you learn to 3 Commands edit commands save them for later use and write interactive commands Formatting Query Explains how you can format columns 4 Results clarify your report with spacing and summary lines define page dimensions and titles and store and print query results Also uses step by step examples Database This chapter is intended for use by DBAs 5 Administration and covers the basic database administration features in S
129. L Plus command prompt SQL Plus does not execute the command but stores it in the SOL buffer 2 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands see the section The SQL Buffer below for details If you subsequently enter another SOL command SQL Plus overwrites the previous command in the buffer Creating Stored Procedures Stored procedures are PL SQL functions packages or procedures To create stored procedures you use SQL CREATE commands The following SQL CREATE commands are used to create stored procedures a CREATE FUNCTION a CREATE LIBRARY a CREATE PACKAGE a CREATE PACKAGE BODY a CREATE PROCEDURE a CREATE TRIGGER a CREATE TYPE Entering any of these commands places you in PL SQL mode where you can enter your PL SQL subprogram For more information see the section Running PL SQL Blocks in this chapter When you are done typing your PL SQL subprogram enter a period on a line by itself to terminate PL SQL mode To run the SQL command and create the stored procedure you must enter RUN or slash A semicolon will not execute these CREATE commands When you use CREATE to create a stored procedure a message appears if there are compilation errors To view these errors you use SHOW ERRORS For example SQL gt SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE ASSIGNVL For more information about the SHOW command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To execute a PL SQL statement that
130. L Plus from a slow communications device OFF allows SQL Plus to display trailing blanks TRIMOUT ON does not affect spooled output TRIMS POOL ON OFF Determines whether SQL Plus allows trailing blanks at the end of each spooled line ON removes blanks at the end of each line OFF allows SQL Plus to include trailing blanks TRIMSPOOL ON does not affect terminal output UND ERLINE c ON OFF Sets the character used to underline column headings in SQL Plus reports to c Note c cannot be an alphanumeric character or a white Command Reference 8 113 SET space ON or OFF turns underlining on or off ON changes the value of c back to the default VER IFY OFF ON Controls whether SQL Plus lists the text of a SQL statement or PL SQL command before and after SQL Plus replaces substitution variables with values ON lists the text OFF suppresses the listing WRA P OFF ON Controls whether SQL Plus truncates the display of a SELECTed row if it is too long for the current line width OFF truncates the SELECTed row ON allows the SELECTed row to wrap to the next line Use the WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command to override the setting of WRAP for specific columns Usage Notes SQL Plus maintains system variables also called SET command variables to allow you to establish a particular environment for a SQL Plus session You can change these system variables with the SET command and list them with the SHOW
131. L commands E 4 SQL Plus commands E 4 DISCONNECT command 6 2 8 65 DOCUMENT command F 2 REMARK as newer version of F 3 DOCUMENT variable F 4 DROP command disabling E 6 DUPLICATES clause 8 24 Index 7 E ECHO variable 3 14 8 106 EDIT command 3 7 8 66 creating command files with 3 11 defining EDITOR 3 7 8 66 disabling E 5 modifying command files 3 16 8 66 setting default filename 8 106 EDITFILE variable 8 106 EMBEDDED variable 8 106 EMP table 1 6 Empty line displaying 8 81 Enhancement list Release 8 1 B 2 Error messages interpreting 2 18 Errors making line containing current 3 4 Escape characters definition of 8 106 ESCAPE variable 3 25 8 106 EXCLUSIVE clause 8 133 EXECUTE command 8 68 disabling E 5 Executing a CREATE command 2 9 Execution statistics including in report 8 103 EXIT clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 152 EXIT command 2 4 8 69 BindVariable clause 8 69 COMMIT clause 8 69 disabling E 5 FAILURE clause 8 69 inacommand file 8 131 ROLLBACK clause 8 69 WARNING clause 8 69 Exit conditional 8 150 8 152 Extension 8 98 8 112 8 136 F FAILURE clause 8 69 FEEDBACK variable 8 107 File extension 8 98 8 112 8 136 File extensions 3 18 Index 8 File names in at sign command 8 6 in double at sign command 8 8 in EDIT command 8 66 in GET command 8 71 in SAVE command 3 8 8 98 in SPOOL command 4 35 8 129 in SQLPLUS
132. MAT Followed by a number format such as 99 999 sets the default format for displaying numbers in query results SET PAGESIZE Followed by a number sets the number of lines per page SET PAUSE Followed by ON causes SQL Plus to pause at the beginning of each page of output SQL Plus continues scrolling after you enter Return Followed by text sets the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses you must also set PAUSE to ON Manipulating Commands 3 17 Saving Commands for Later Use SET SHIFTINOUT Followed by VISIBLE will display shift characters as a visible character Setting SHIFTINOUT to INVISIBLE will not display any shift characters Note this command can only be used with shift sensitive character sets SET TIME Followed by ON displays the current time before each command prompt See the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information on these and other SET command variables you may wish to set in your SQL Plus LOGIN file Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables You can store the current SQL Plus system SET variables in a host operating system file a command file with the STORE command If you alter any variables this command file can be run to restore the original values This is useful if you run a report that alters system variables and you want to reset their values after the report has finished To store the current setting of all system variables enter SQL gt
133. MM To add a two line WHERE clause enter SQL gt LIST 2 2 FROM EMP SQL gt INPUT 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN 4 AND CO 500 5 INPUT prompts you for new lines until you enter an empty line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines ECT ENAME DEPTNO SAL COMM ROM EMP E JOB SALESMAN D CO 500 RDER BY ENAME Ow WN eH Ops An 1 8 76 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference LIST LIST Purpose Lists one or more lines of the SOL buffer Syntax L IST n n m n n LAST n LAST LAST Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause n Lists line n nm Lists lines n through m n Lists line n through the current line n LAST Lists line n through the last line Lists the current line on Lists the current line through line n LAST Lists the current line through the last line LAST Lists the last line Enter LIST with no clauses to list all lines Usage Notes The last line listed becomes the new current line marked by an asterisk Example To list the contents of the buffer enter SQL gt LIST You will see a listing of all lines in the buffer similar to the following example 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO JOB FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB CLERK 4
134. MY_ERROR_VAR SQL gt UPDATE NON_EXISTED TABLE SET COL1 COL1 1 UPDATE NON_EXISTED_TABLE SET COL1 COL1 1 ERROR at line 1 ORA 00942 table or view does not exist Disconnected from Oracle The following examples show that the WHENEVER SQLERROR command does not have any effect on SQL Plus commands but does on SQL commands and PL SQL blocks SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOL SQLCODE SQL gt COLU ENAME HEADIING EMPLOYEE NAME Unknown COLUMN option HEADIING SQL gt SHOW NON_EXISTED OPTION Command Reference 8 153 WHENEVER SQLERROR Unknown SHOW option NON_EXISTED_OPTION SQL gt GET NON_EXISTED_FILE SQL Unable to open NON_EXISTED_FILE SQL The following PL SQL block error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOL SQLCODE SQL gt BEGI 2 SELECT COLUMN_DOES NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL 3 END 4 SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL RROR at line 2 RA 06550 line 2 column 10 LS 00201 identifier COLUMN_DOES NOT_EXIST must be declared RA 06550 line 2 column 3 PL SQL SQL Statement ignored UO fF O Disconnected from Oracle
135. N 5 PRAGMA RESTRICT_REFERENCES 6 rational_order RNDS WNDS RNPS WNPS 8 62 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE BODY rational AS OBJECT 2 MAP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order gt RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION IS 3 BEGI 4 RETURN NUMERATOR DENOMINATOR 5 END 6 END 7 SQL gt DESCRIBE rational SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type UMERATOR 3ER DENOMINATOR BER ETHOD VAP NE BER FUNCTION RATIONAL ORDER RETURNS BER To describe the object emp_object and then format the output using the SET DESCRIBE command first enter SQL gt desc emp object SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type EMPLOYEE RECUR_PERSON DEPT RECUR_DEPARTMENT START_DATE DATE POSITIO VARCHAR2 1 SAL RECUR_SALARY To format the DESCRIBE output use the SET command as follows SQL gt set linesize 80 SQL gt set desc depth 2 SQL gt set desc indent on SQL gt set desc line off Command Reference 8 63 DESCRIBE To display the settings for the object use the SHOW command as follows SQL gt show desc describe DEPTH 2 LINENUM OFF INDENT ON SQL gt desc emp_object SQL Plus lists the following informati
136. O SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 19625 Formatting Query Results 4 19 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Note The format of the column SAL controls the appearance of the sum of SAL as well as the individual values of SAL When you establish the format of a NUMBER column you must allow for the size of sums you will include in your report Computing Summary You can Lines at the End of the Report calculate and print summary lines based on all values in a column by using BREAK and COMPUTE in the following forms BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON REPORT Example 4 13 Computing and Printing a Grand Total To calculate and print the grand total of salaries for all salesmen and change the compute label first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands SQL gt BRE AK ON REPORT SQL gt CO PUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SAL ON REPORT Next en ter and run a new query SQL gt SELF CT ENAME SAL 2 FRO EMP 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN SQL Plus displays the results ENAME SAL ALL
137. OL Plus Accessing Tells you how to connect to default and 6 Databases remote databases and how to copy data between databases and between tables on the same database PART Il Reference Chapter Topic Description Number Starting SQL Plus Explains how to access SQL Plus from the 7 and Getting Help operating system prompt and how to access online help Command Gives you a SQL Plus command summary 8 Reference and detailed descriptions of each SQL Plus command in alphabetical order COPY Command Lists copy command error messages their Appendix A Messages and causes and appropriate actions for error Codes recovery Release 8 1 5 Describes enhancements to SQL Plus in Appendix B Enhancements release 8 1 5 SQL Plus Limits Lists the maximum values for elements of Appendix C SOL Plus SQL Command List Provides a list of major SQL commands and Appendix D clauses Security Explains how to restrict access to certain Appendix E SQL Plus and SQL commands SQL Plus Provides information on SQL Plus Appendix F Commands from commands from earlier releases Earlier Releases Glossary Defines technical terms associated with Glossary Oracle and SQL Plus xiii Related Publications Related documentation includes the following publications xiv SQL Plus Quick Reference PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Oracle8i SQL Reference Oracle8i Concepts Oracle8i Administrator s Guide Oracle amp i Backup and Recovery Oracle amp i Ap
138. OVER clause 8 133 RECOVER command 8 85 AUTOMATIC clause 8 85 CANCEL clause 8 87 CONTINUE clause 8 87 DATABASE clause 8 86 DATAFILE clause 8 87 FROM clause 8 86 LOGFILE clause 8 87 NOPARALLEL clause 8 88 PARALLEL DEGREE clause 8 87 PARALLEL DEGREE DEFAULT clause 8 87 PARALLEL INSTANCES clause 8 88 PARALLEL INSTANCES DEFAULT clause 8 88 STANDBY DATABASE clause 8 86 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 8 87 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 8 87 TABLESPACE clause 8 87 UNTIL CANCEL clause 8 86 UNTIL CHANGE clause 8 86 UNTIL CONTROLFILE clause 8 87 UNTIL TIME clause 8 86 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 8 86 Recovery RECOVER command 8 85 RECOVERY command and database recovery 5 5 RECSEP variable 4 10 8 110 RECSEPCHAR variable 4 10 8 110 Redo Log Files ARCHIVE LOG command 8 15 REFCURSOR bind variables 3 32 in a stored function 3 32 REFCURSOR clause VARIABLE command 8 145 RELEASE clause 8 125 REMARK command 3 11 8 90 RENAME command disabling E 6 REPFOOTER clause 8 125 REPFOOTER command 4 23 8 91 aligning footer elements 8 94 BOLD clause 8 94 CENTER clause 8 94 COL clause 8 94 FORMAT clause 8 94 indenting report footers 8 94 LEFT clause 8 94 most often used clauses 4 23 OFF clause 8 94 RIGHT clause 8 94 SKIP clause 8 94 suppressing current definition 8 94 TAB clause 8 94 REPHEADER clause 8 125 REPHEADER command 4 23 8 93 aligning header elements 4 26 aligning heading elements 8 94 BOLD c
139. R with the EMP and DEPT tables Figure 1 1 and Figure 1 2 Multi User Systems If several people share your computer s operating system your DBA can set up your SQL Plus username and password You will also need a system username and password to gain admittance to the operating system These may or may not be the same ones you use with SQL Plus Single User Systems If only one person at a time uses your computer you may be expected to perform the DBAs functions for yourself In that case you can use the Oracle username SCOTT and password TIGER If you want to define your own username and password see the Oracle8i SQL Reference Access to Sample Tables Each table in the database is owned by a particular user You may wish to have your own copies of the sample tables to use as you try the examples in this Guide To get your own copies of the tables see your DBA or run the Oracle supplied command file named DEMOBLD you run this file from your operating system not from SQL Plus When you have no more use for the sample tables remove them by running another Oracle supplied command file named DEMODROP For instructions on how to run DEMOBLD and DEMODROPB see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system 1 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 2 Learning SQL Plus Basics This chapter helps you learn the basics of using SOL Plus including the following topics Getting Started
140. REP LACE APP END Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Specifies the command file in which you wish to save the buffer s contents REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify Usage Notes If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing this default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If you wish to SAVE a file under a name identical to a SAVE command clause CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must specify a file extension When you SAVE the contents of the SOL buffer SAVE adds a line containing a slash to the end of the file If the filename you specify is the word file you need to put the name in single quotes 8 98 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SAVE Examples To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension SQL enter SQL gt SAVE DEPTSALRPT To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension OLD enter SQL gt SAVE DEPTSALRPT OLD Command Reference 8 99 SET SET Purpose Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment for your curren
141. RIES ENAME SAL SMITH 800 ADAMS 1 100 JAMES 950 MILLER 1 300 COLSEP To set the column separator to enter SQL gt SET COLSEP SQL gt SELECT ENAME JOB DEPTNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 20 Command Reference 8 115 SET The following output results ENAME JOB DEPTNO SMITH CLERK 20 JONES MANAGER 20 SCOTT ANALYST 20 ADAMS CLERK 20 FORD ANALYST 20 COMPATIBILITY To run a command file SALARY SQL created with Oracle7 enter SQL gt SET CO SQL gt START SALARY PATIBILITY V7 After running the file reset compatibility to V8 to run command files created with Oracle8 SQL gt SET CO PATIBILITY V8 Alternatively you can add the command SET COMPATIBILITY V7 to the beginning of the command file and reset COMPATIBILITY to V8 at the end of the file DESCRIBE To describe the object emp_object to a depth of two levels and indent the output while also displaying line numbers first describe the object as follows SQL gt desc emp_object The following output results ame Null Type EMPLOYEE RECUR_PERSON AME VARCHAR2 20 ADDR RECUR_ADDRESS ADDR1 RECUR_ADDRESS1 DOB DATE GENDER VARCHARZ2 10 DEP RECUR_DEPARTMENT DEPTNO NUMBER DEPT_NAMEF VARCHAR2 20 LOCATIO VARCHAR2
142. RT as a report header on a separate page and to center it enter SQL gt REPHEADER PAGE CENTER EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT SQL gt TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SOL PNO SQL gt SELECT ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL gt 2000 Page 1 EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT Command Reference 8 95 REPHEADER Page 2 ENAME SAL JONES 2975 BLAKE 2850 CLARK 2450 SCOTT 3000 KING 5000 FORD 3000 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter SQL gt REPHEADER OFF 8 96 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RUN RUN Purpose Lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer Syntax R UN Usage Notes RUN causes the last line of the SQL buffer to become the current line The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the SQL buffer on your screen Example Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query SELECT DEPTNO FROM DEPT To RUN the query enter SQL gt RUN The following output results 1 SELECT DEPTNO FROM DEPT Command Reference 8 97 SAVE SAVE Purpose Saves the contents of the SQL buffer in a host operating system file a command file Syntax SAV E file_name ext CRE ATE
143. RT PROMPT1 Enter a title up to 30 characters long Title Department Report as of 1 1 95 SQL Plus displays the following output Department Report as of 1 1 95 DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Before continuing turn the TTITLE command you entered in the command file off as shown below SQL gt TTITLE OFF Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable If you want to customize the prompt for a substitution variable value use PROMPT and ACCEPT in conjunction with the substitution variable as shown in the following example 3 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands Example 3 16 Using PROMPT and ACCEPT in Conjunction with Substitution Variables As you have seen in Example 3 15 SQL Plus automatically generates a prompt for a value when you use a substitution variable You can replace this prompt by including PROMPT and ACCEPT in the command file with the query that references the substitution variable To create such a file enter the commands shown SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER buffer cleared SQL gt INPUT 1 PROMPT Enter a valid employee number 2 PROMPT For example 7123 7456 7890 3 ACCE ENUMBER NUMBER PROMPT Emp no 7 4 SELECT ENAME MGR JOB
144. Represents a variable created in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command and then referenced in PL SQL or other subprograms Bind Variable exits the subprogram and returns you to SQL Plus ROLLBACK Executes a ROLLBACK statement and abandons pending changes to the database before exiting EXIT with no clauses commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS Command Reference 8 69 EXIT Usage Notes EXIT allows you to specify an operating system return code This allows you to run SQL Plus command files in batch mode and to detect programmatically the occurrence of an unexpected event The manner of detection is operating system specific See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details The key words SUCCESS WARNING and FAILURE represent operating system dependent values On some systems WARNING and FAILURE may be indistinguishable Note SUCCESS FAILURE and WARNING are not reserved words The range of operating system return codes is also restricted on some operating systems This limits the portability of EXIT n and EXIT variable between platforms For example on UNIX there is only one byte of storage for return codes therefore the range for return codes is limited to zero to 255 If you make a syntax error in the EXIT options or use a non numeric variable SQL Plus performs an EXIT FAILURE COMMIT For information on exiting conditionally see the WHENEVER SQLERROR a
145. SAL HEADING Salary SQL gt COLU COMM HEADING Commission SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL COMM p O 2 FRO 3 WHERE J B SALESMAN 4 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns SQL Plus displays the following output Department Employee Salary Commission 30 ALLEN 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 30 MARTIN 1250 1400 30 TURNER 1500 0 Note The new headings will remain in effect until you enter different headings reset each column s format or exit from SOL Plus To change a column heading to two or more words enclose the new heading in single or double quotation marks when you enter the COLUMN command To display a column heading on more than one line use a vertical bar where you want to begin a new line You can use a character other than a vertical bar by changing the setting of the HEADSEP variable of the SET command See the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information Example 4 2 Splitting a Column Heading To give the column ENAME the heading EMPLOYEE NAME and to split the new heading onto two lines enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee Name Now rerun the query with the slash command SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLEN 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 30 MARTIN 1250 14
146. SMAN WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 TURNER 1500 ALLEN 1600 KIRKE O OZ O O a TOTAL 5600 To calculate the total of salaries less than 1 000 on a report enter SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON REPORT SQL gt BREAK ON REPORT SQL gt COLU DUMMY HEADING SQL gt SELECT DUMMY SAL EMPNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 1000 4 ORDER BY SAL The following output results SAL EMPNO 800 7369 950 7900 sum 5350 8 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE To compute the average and maximum salary for the accounting and sales departments enter SQL gt BREAK ON DNAME SKIP 1 SQL gt COMPUTE AVG LABEL Dept Average gt AX LABEL Dept Maximum gt OF SAL ON DNAME SQL gt SELECT DNAME ENAME SAL 2 FROM DEPT E 3 WHERE DEPT DEPTNO EMP DEPTNO 4 AND DNAME IN ACCOUNTING SALES 5 ORDER BY DNAVE The following output results DNAME ENAME SAL ACCOUNTING CLARK 2450 KING 5000 MILLER 1300 KKK KK KKK KKK KKK O O ew Dept Average 2916 66667 Dept Maximum 5000 SALES ALLE 1600 WARD 1250 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 MARTIN 1250 BLAKE 2850 KEKE KK KKK RK a Dept Average 1566 66667 Dept Ma
147. SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 8 1 5 February 1999 Part No A66736 01 ORACLE SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 8 1 5 Part No A66736 01 Copyright 1996 1999 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Contributing Authors Frank Rovitto Contributors Larry Baer Lisa Colston Roland Kovacs Karen Denchfield Masterson Alison Holloway Sanjeev Jhala Christopher Jones Anita Lam Nimish Mehta Luan Nim Bud Osterberg Irene Paradisis Richard Rendell Farokh Shapoorjee Larry Stevens Andre Touma The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be the licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and Oracle disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the doc
148. SQL Plus detects an error in a command it will try to help you out by displaying an error message Example 2 8 Interpreting an Error Message For example if you misspell the name of a table while entering a command an error message will tell you that the table or view does not exist SOL gt D ESCRIBE ERROR ORA 04 DPT 043 object DPT does not exist You will often be able to figure out how to correct the problem from the message alone If you need further explanation take one of the following steps to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a f the error is a numbered error for the SQL Plus COPY command look up the message in Appendix A of this Guide If the error is a numbered error beginning with the letters ORA look up the message in the Oracle8i Error Messages manual or in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a Ifthe error is unnumbered look up correct syntax for the command that generated the error in Chapter 8 of this Guide for a SQL Plus command in the Oracle8i SQL Reference for a SQL command or in the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for a PL SQL block Otherwise contact your DBA 2 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 3 Manipulating Commands This chapter helps you learn to manipulate SQL Plus commands SQL commands and PL SQL blocks It covers t
149. STORE SET file _name By default SQL Plus adds the extension SQL to the file name If you want to use a different file extension type a period at the end of the file name followed by the extension Alternatively you can use the SET SUFFIX command to change the default file extension Restoring the System Variables To restore the stored system variables enter SQL gt START file_name If the file has the default extension as specified by the SET SUFFIX command you do not need to add the period and extension to the file name You can also use the at sign or the double at sign commands to run the command file 3 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands Example 3 10 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables To store the current values of the SQL Plus system variables in a new command file plusenv sql SQL gt STORE SET plusenv Created file plusenv Now the value of any system variable can be changed SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 24 SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 60 SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 60 The original values of the system variables can then be restored from the command file SQL gt START plusenv SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 24 Writing Interactive Commands The following features of SQL Plus make it possible for you to set up command files that allow end user input a defining use
150. Syntax I NPUT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text you wish to add To add a single line enter the text of the line after the command INPUT separating the text from the command with a space To begin the line with one or more spaces enter two or more spaces between INPUT and the first non blank character of text To add several lines enter INPUT with no text INPUT prompts you for each line To leave INPUT enter a null empty line Usage Notes If you enter a line number at the command prompt larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text then SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Examples Assume the SQL buffer contains the following command 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO SAL COMM 2 FROM EMP To add an ORDER BY clause to the query enter SQL gt LIST 2 2 FROM EMP SQL gt INPUT ORDER BY ENAME Command Reference 8 75 INPUT LIST 2 ensures that line 2 is the current line INPUT adds a new line containing the ORDER BY clause after the current line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY ENAME iw PTNO SAL CO
151. TERMOUT ON 4 When you start SOL Plus these commands place the value of SYSDATE the current date into a variable named _DATE To display the current date you can reference _DATE in a title as you would any other variable The date format model you include in the SELECT command in your LOGIN file determines the format in which SQL Plus displays the date See your Oracle8i SQL Reference for more information on date format models For more information about the LOGIN file see the section Modifying Your LOGIN File in Chapter 3 You can also enter these commands interactively at the command prompt For more information see the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 Setting Page Dimensions Typically a page of a report contains the number of blank line s set in the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command a top title column headings your query results and a bottom title SQL Plus displays a report that is too long to fit on one page on several consecutive pages each with its own titles and column headings The amount of data SQL Plus displays on each page depends on the current page dimensions The default page dimensions used by SQL Plus are shown below number of lines before the top title 1 number of lines per page from the top title to the bottom of the page 24 a number of characters per line 80 4 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions You can chan
152. TEs for that column FOLD_A FTER Inserts a carriage return after the column heading and after each row in the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return after the last column in the SELECT list FOLD_B EFORE Inserts a carriage return before the column heading and before each row of the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return before the first column in the SELECT list Command Reference 8 33 COLUMN FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable Character Columns The default width of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR and NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING columns is the width of the column in the database SQL Plus formats these datatypes left justified If a value does not fit within the column width SQL Plus wraps or truncates the character string depending on the setting of SET WRAP A LONG CLOB or NCLOB column s width defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSIZE or SET LONG whichever one is smaller To change the width of a datatype to n use FORMAT An A stands for alphanumeric If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading If you specify a width for a LONG CLOB or NCLOB column SQL Plus uses the LONGCHUNKSIZE or the specified width whichever is smaller as the column width DATE Columns The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns
153. UPDATE D 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference E Security This appendix describes the available methods for controlling access to database tables and SQL Plus commands The available methods for security fall into two broad categories a PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table a Roles Security E 1 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Overview Various Oracle products use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE a table in the SYSTEM account to provide product level security that supplements the user level security provided by the SQL GRANT and REVOKE commands and user roles DBAs can use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE to disable certain SOL and SQL Plus commands in the SQL Plus environment on a per user basis SQL Plus not Oracle enforces this security DBAs can even restrict access to the GRANT REVOKE and SET ROLE commands to control users ability to change their database privileges SQL Plus reads restrictions from PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE when a user logs in to SQL Plus and maintains those restrictions for the duration of the session Changes to PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE will only take effect the next time the affected users log in to SQL Plus The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table applies only to the local database If accessing objects on a remote database via a database link the PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE for the remote database does not apply The remote database cannot extract the username and password from the database link in order
154. URSOR Usage Notes Bind variables may be used as parameters to stored procedures or may be directly referenced in anonymous PL SQL blocks To display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the PRINT command For more information see the PRINT command in this chapter To automatically display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the SET AUTOPRINT command For more information see the SET AUTOPRINT command in this chapter Bind variables cannot be used in the COPY command or SQL statements except in PL SQL blocks Instead use substitution variables When you execute a VARIABLE CLOB or NCLOB command SQL Plus associates a LOB locator with the bind variable The LOB locator is automatically populated when you execute a SELECT clob_column INTO cv statement in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the LOB locator after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or when you exit SQL Plus SQL Plus SET commands such as SET LONG and SET LONGCHUNKSIZE and SET LOBOFFSET may be used to control the size of the buffer while PRINTing CLOB or NCLOB bind variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables may be used to reference PL SQL 2 3 or higher Cursor Variables allowing PL SQL output to be formatted by SQL Plus For more information on PL SQL Cursor Variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference When you execute a VARIABLE REFCURSOR command SQL Plus creates a cursor bind variable The cu
155. YPE so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter SQL gt ATTRIBUTE EMP_TYPE SAL FORMAT 9 999 990 99 8 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK BREAK Purpose Specifies where and how formatting will change in a report such as suppressing display of duplicate values for a given column a skipping a line each time a given column value changes printing COMPUTEd figures each time a given column value changes or at the end of the report see also the COMPUTE command Also lists the current BREAK definition Syntax BRE AK ON report_element action action where report_element Requires the following syntax column expr ROW REPORT action Requires the following syntax SKI P n SKI P PAGE NODUP LICATES DUP LICATES Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause ON column action action When you include action s specifies action s for SQL Plus to take whenever a break occurs in the specified column called the break column column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement A break is one of three events a change in the value of a column or expression the output of a row a the end of a report When you omit action s BREAK ON c
156. _ ae sum 5600 2200 You can also print multiple summary lines on the same break column To do so include the function for each summary line in the COMPUTE command as follows COMPUTE function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column Formatting Query Results 4 21 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines If you include multiple columns after OFF and before ON COMPUTE calculates and prints values for each column you specify Example 4 15 Computing Multiple Summary Lines on the Same Break Column To compute the average and sum of salaries for the sales department first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SQL gt COMPUTE AVG SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO Now enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENA E SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 30 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SAL SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 TURNER 1500 ALLE 1600 BLAKE 2850 KERR RAAEN o o e O E avg 1566 66667 sum 9400 Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions You can list your current COMPUTE definitions by entering the COMPUTE command with no clauses COMPUTE You can remove all the COMPUTE definitions
157. a message is displayed if the stored procedure has any compilation errors To see the errors you use SHOW ERRORS When you specify SHOW ERRORS with no arguments SQL Plus shows compilation errors for the most recently created or altered stored procedure When you specify the type function procedure package package body trigger view type or type body and the name of the PL SQL stored procedure SQL Plus shows errors for that stored procedure For more information on compilation errors see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference schema contains the named object If you omit schema SHOW ERRORS assumes the object is located in your current schema SHOW ERRORS output displays the line and column number of the error LINE COL as well as the error itself ERROR LINE COL and ERROR have default widths of 8 and 65 respectively You can alter these widths using the COLUMN command LNO Shows the current line number the position in the current page of the display and or spooled output PARAMETERS parameter_name Displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters You can use a string after the command to see a subset of parameters whose names include that string For example if you enter SQL gt SHOW PARAMETERS COUNT you would see NAME TYPE VALUE db file multiblock_read_count integer 12 spin _ count integer 0 The SHOW PARAMETERS command without any string follo
158. abase log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 5 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Database Recovery Database Recovery If a damaged database is in ARCHIVELOG mode it is a candidate for either complete media recovery or incomplete media recovery operations To begin media recovery operations use the RECOVER command For more information about using the RECOVER command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 In order to begin recovery operations you must have DBA privileges To recover the database up to a specified time using a control backup file enter SQL gt RE CO ER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 1998 11 23 12 47 30 gt USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE To recover two offline tablespaces enter SQL gt RE CO ER TABL ESPACE tsl ts2 Make sure that the tablespaces you are interested in recovering have been taken offline before proceeding with recovery for those tablespaces Database Administration 5 5 Database Recovery 5 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 6 Accessing SQL Databases This chapter explains how to access databases through SQL Plus and discusses the following topics a Connecting to the Default Database Connecting to a Remote Database Copying Data from One Databas
159. ables Suppose you want to write a query like the one in SALES see Example 3 7 to list the employees with various jobs not just those whose job is SALESMAN You could do that by editing a different CHAR value into the WHERE clause each time you run the command but there is an easier way By using a substitution variable in place of the value SALESMAN in the WHERE clause you can get the same results you would get if you had written the values into the command itself A substitution variable is a user variable name preceded by one or two ampersands amp When SQL Plus encounters a substitution variable in a command SQL Plus executes the command as though it contained the value of the substitution variable rather than the variable itself 3 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands For example if the variable SORTCOL has the value JOB and the variable MYTABLE has the value EMP SOL Plus executes the commands SQL gt BREAK ON amp SORTCOL SQL gt SELECT amp SORTCOL SAL 2 FROM amp MYTABLE 3 ORDER BY amp SORTCOL as if they were SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SQL gt SELECT JOB SAL FROM EMP ORDER BY JOB 2 3 The BREAK command suppresses duplicate values of the column named in SORTCOL For more information about the BREAK command see the section Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines in Chapter 4 Where and How to Use Substitu
160. adings in a report enter SQL gt SET HEADING OFF If you then run a SQL SELECT command SQL gt SELECT ENAME SAL FROM EMP 2 WHERE JOB CLERK the following output results ADAMS 1100 JAMES 950 MILLER 1300 INSTANCE To set the default instance to PROD1 enter SQL gt SET INSTANCE PROD1 To set the instance back to the default or local enter SQL gt SET INSTANCE local LOBOFFSET To set the starting position from which a CLOB column s data is retrieved to the 22nd position enter SQL gt SET LOBOFFSET 22 The CLOB data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 23rd character LOGSOURCE To set the default location of log files for recovery to the directory usr oracle81 dbs arch enter SQL gt SET LOGSOURCE usr oracle81 dbs arch SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE 8 118 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET LONG To set the maximum width for displaying and copying LONG values to 500 enter SQL gt SET LONG 500 The LONG data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 501st character LONGCHUNKSIZE To set the size of the increments in which SQL Plus retrieves LONG values to 100 characters enter SQL gt SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 100 The LONG data will be retrieved in increments of 100 characters until the entire value i
161. ame and password with an optional Net8 address username The name by which a user is known to the Oracle database server and to other users Every username is associated with a private password and both must be entered to connect to an Oracle database See also account user variable A variable defined and set by you explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command VARCHAR An Oracle Corporation datatype Specifically this datatype functions identically to the Oracle VARCHAR datatype see definition below However Oracle Corporation recommends that you use VARCHAR2 instead of VARCHAR because Oracle Corporation may change the functionality of VARCHAR in the future VARCHAR2 An Oracle Corporation datatype Specifically it is a variable length alpha numeric string with a maximum length of 4000 characters If data entered for a column of type VARCHAR is less than 4000 no spaces will be padded the data is stored with a length as entered If data entered is more than 4000 an error occurs variable A named object that holds a single value SQL Plus uses bind substitution system and user variables width The width of a column parameter or layout object Width is measured in characters a space is a character wrapping A reporting or output feature in which a portion of text is moved to a new line when the entire text does not fit on one line comment delimiter 3 12
162. ange the default filename by using the SET EDITFILE command For more information about setting a default filename for the EDIT command see the EDITFILE variable of the SET command in this chapter Note The default file AFIEDT BUF may have a different name on some operating systems 8 66 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EDIT If you do not specify a filename and the buffer is empty EDIT returns an error message To leave the editing session and return to SQL Plus terminate the editing session in the way customary for the text editor When you leave the editor SQL Plus loads the contents of the file into the buffer Example To edit the file REPORT with the extension SQL using your host operating system text editor enter SQL gt EDIT F EPORT Command Reference 8 67 EXECUTE EXECUTE Purpose Executes a single PL SQL statement The EXECUTE command is often useful when you want to execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure For more information on PL SQL see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Syntax EXEC UTE statement Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause statement Represents a PL SQL statement Usage Notes If your EXECUTE command cannot fit on one line because of the PL SQL statement use the SQL Plus continuation character a hyphen as shown in the example below The length of t
163. apsed period of time saving the data on commands run during the period in a timer See TIMING in Chapter 8 and the Oracle installation and user s manuals provided for your operating system for more information To delete all timers enter CLEAR TIMING at the command prompt Running Host Operating System Commands You can execute a host operating system command from the SQL Plus command prompt This is useful when you want to perform a task such as listing existing host operating system files To run a host operating system command enter the SQL Plus command HOST followed by the host operating system command For example this SQL Plus command runs a host command DIRECTORY SQL SQL gt HOST DIRECTORY SOQL When the host command finishes running the SQL Plus command prompt appears again Getting Help While you use SQL Plus you may find that you need to list column definitions for a table or start and stop the display that scrolls by You may also need to interpret error messages you receive when you enter a command incorrectly or when there is a problem with Oracle or SQL Plus The following sections describe how to get help for those situations Listing a Table Definition To see the definitions of each column in a given table use the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 2 6 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the column definitions of the three columns in the sample table DEPT enter SQL gt DESCRIBE DEPT
164. archived It also displays information about redo log files The CONNECT command now has an AS clause The AS clause allows privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges The SET command now has an AUTORECOVERY clause The AUTORECOVERY clause specifies whether default archived redo log files are to be used during recovery The SET command now has a DESCRIBE clause The DESCRIBE clause specifies the depth or level to which objects can be described The SET command now has an INSTANCE clause The INSTANCE clause changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance The SET command now has a LOGSOURCE clause The LOGSOURCE clause specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The SET command now has a SQLBLANKLINES clause The SQLBLANKLINES clause allows and preserves blank lines within any SQL command The SHOW command now has a PARAMETERS clause The PARAMETERS clause displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters The SHOW command now has an SGA clause The SGA clause displays information about the current instance s System Global Area B 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference C SQL Plus Limits Table C 1 on the following page lists the limit or maximum value of each of the SQL Plus elements shown The limits shown are valid for most operating systems SQL Plus Limits C 1 Table C 1 SQL Pl
165. archiving of online redo log files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information about redo log files ATTRIBUTE Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column and lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes BREAK Specifies where and how formatting will change in a report or lists the current break definition BTITLE Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page or lists the current BTITLE definition CHANGE Changes text on the current line in the buffer CLEAR Resets or erases the current clause or setting for the specified option such as BREAKS or COLUMNS COLUMN Specifies display characteristics for a given column or lists the current display characteristics for a single column or for all columns COMPUTE Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions CONNECT Connects a given username to Oracle COPY Copies data from a query to a table in a local or remote 8 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference database SQL Plus Command Summary Command Description DEFINE Specifies a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables DEL Deletes one or more lines of the buffer
166. ariable or any of the following system maintained values a SQL LNO current line number a SQL PNO current page number a SQL RELEASE current Oracle release number Command Reference 8 93 REPHEADER OFF COL n S KIP TAB n a SQL CODE current error code a SQL USER current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the report header or footer You can format variable with the FORMAT clause Turns the report header or footer off suppresses its display without affecting its definition Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in this context means print position not table column n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating
167. ase Automatically cccccccccssssesescececesesestensteseseseeneseseseeenene 2 14 Stopping a Command while it is RUNNINg s sseesesseseessesssrtessisressstensissesnentensisresnesnennessessns 2 15 Collecting Timing Statistics on Commands YOu Run c ccesccessscsceeseseststeeseseeseeseseenenene 2 16 Running Host Operating System Command cccccccc cee cceeeececeeeesesnececeseeeneneceseeenes 2 16 Getting Helpon i yar arts akties peed pais apnea Eare eE E eben te 2 16 Listing a Tabl Definition s2 3 ic ett aii inte ii eae Seta ne te eae edie ate ceive 2 16 Listing PL SQL Definitions ong eiiis ens neii esena e a eaae raaa ea pa ia iaaiiai 2 17 Controlling the Displayric srira tees a E dates RREN E A ERT a E EAN E 2 17 Interpreting Error Messages cccccesscsseessesesssensesescseesscecsesesessesescsenseesesssseeeeesssesseeeeseseeeeees 2 18 Manipulating Commands Editing Commands sisi fcceccecs heaves Nive ceties Scovuvevscusvasdestvale ual dvenvuseutuetoes fesse stungbeilets Such a E E EES 3 2 Listing the Buffer Contents cenetsHes ascents ra E i Ta a roe aiaia Et 3 3 Editing th Current Line sssini ii iras enesik t aiai 3 4 Addinga New Linehstis ispata ae a E EEE Ea ome nara a a esa 3 5 Appending Texttoa LiNeicsssetiisssseisi n ities RE E R eel 3 6 Delete Times ERE E E T E A A T 3 7 Editing Commands with a System Editor ss ssssseeseesesesseessesteseessentestestesensnesteseesnnsnenreneesness 3 7 Saving Command
168. ation such as the Oracle database Whereas the username or ID is public the secret password ensures that only the owner of the username can use that name or access that data PL SQL The Oracle procedural language extension of SQL PL SQL combines the ease and flexibility of SQL with the procedural functionality of a structured programming language such as IF THEN WHILE and LOOP Even when PL SQL is not stored in the database applications can send blocks of PL SQL to the database rather than individual SQL statements thereby reducing network traffic procedure A set of SQL and PL SQL statements grouped together as an executable unit to perform a very specific task Procedures and functions are nearly identical the only difference between the two is that functions always return a single value to the caller while procedures do not return a value to the caller process 1 A thread of control in an operating system that is a mechanism in an operating system that can execute a series of steps Some operating systems use the terms job or task A process normally has its own private memory area in which it runs prompt 1 A message from a computer program that instructs you to enter data or take some other action 2 Word s used by the system as a cue to assist a user s response Such messages generally ask the user to respond by typing some information in the adjacent field See also command line query A SQL SELECT stat
169. ber to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information To set the printing position to the 21st character enter SQL gt set LOBOFFSET 21 SQL gt print t the following output results T Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information For more information on creating CLOB columns see your Oracle8i SQL Reference Command Reference 8 149 WHENEVER OSERROR WHENEVER OSERROR Purpose Exits SQL Plus if an operating system error occurs such as a file I O error Syntax WHENEVER OSI ERROR EXIT S JCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUI E COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SOL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice See EXIT in this chapter for details Turns off the EXIT option Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the
170. ble 8 146 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE The following example creates some variables and then lists them SQL gt VARIABLE id NUMBER SQL gt VARIABLE txt CHAR 20 SQL gt VARIABLE myvar REFCURSOR SQL gt VARIABLE variable id datatype BER variable txt datatype CHAR 20 variable myvar datatype REFCURSOR The following example lists a single variable SQL gt VARIABLE txt variable txt datatype CHAR 20 The following example illustrates producing a report listing individual salaries and computing the departmental and total salary cost SQL gt VARIABLE RC REFCURSOR 2 BEGI 3 OPEN RC FOR SELECT DNAME ENAME SAL 4 FROM EMP DEP 5 WHERE EMP DEPTNO DEPT DEPTNO 6 ORDER BY EMP DEPTNO ENAME 7 END 8 PL SQL procedure successfully completed T SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 100 FEEDBACK OFF SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Departmental Salary Bill SKIP 2 SQL gt COLU SAL FORMAT 999 990 99 HEADING Salary SQL gt COLU DNAME HEADING Department SQL gt COLU ENAME HEADING Employee SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL Subtotal OF SAL ON DNAM SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL Total OF SAL ON REPORT SQL gt BREAK ON DNAI SKIP 1 ON REPORT SKIP 1 SQL gt PRINT RC Gl
171. by entering the CLEAR command with the COMPUTES clause 4 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 4 16 Removing COMPUTE Definitions To remove all COMPUTE definitions and the accompanying BREAK definition enter the following commands SQL gt CLEAR BREAKS breaks cleared SQL gt CLEAR COMPUTES computes cleared You may wish to place the commands CLEAR BREAKS and CLEAR COMPUTES at the beginning of every command file to ensure that previously entered BREAK and COMPUTE commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions The word page refers to a screenful of information on your display or a page of a spooled printed report You can place top and bottom titles on each page set the number of lines per page and determine the width of each line The word report refers to the complete results of a query You can also place headers and footers on each report and format them in the same way as top and bottom titles on pages Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footers As you have already seen you can set a title to display at the top of each page of a report You can also set a title to display at the bottom of each page The TTITLE command defines the top title the BTITLE command defines the bottom title You can also set a header and footer for each report The REPHEADER command
172. can also use PL SQL subprograms called blocks to manipulate data in the database See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on individual PL SQL statements To enter a PL SQL subprogram in SQL Plus you need to be in PL SQL mode You are placed in PL SQL mode when a You type DECLARE or BEGIN at the SQL Plus command prompt After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the remainder of your PL SQL subprogram a You type a SQL command such as CREATE FUNCTION that creates a stored procedure After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the stored procedure you want to create SQL Plus treats PL SQL subprograms in the same manner as SQL commands except that a semicolon or a blank line does not terminate and execute a block Terminate PL SQL subprograms by entering a period by itself on a new line 2 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands SQL Plus stores the subprograms you enter at the SQL Plus command prompt in the SQL buffer Execute the current subprogram by issuing a RUN or slash command Likewise to execute a SQL CREATE command that creates a stored procedure you must also enter RUN or slash A semicolon will not execute these SQL commands as it does other SQL commands SQL Plus sends the complete PL SQL subprogram to Oracle for processing as it does SQL commands See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for more information You might enter and
173. ce_name Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause schema Represents the schema where the object resides If you omit schema SQL Plus assumes you own object object Represents the table view type procedure function package or synonym you wish to describe net_service_name Consists of the database link name corresponding to the database where object exists For more information on which privileges allow access to another table in a different schema refer to the Oracle8i SQL Reference Usage Notes The description for tables views types and synonyms contains the following information each column s name whether or not null values are allowed NULL or NOT NULL for each column datatype of columns for example NUMBER CHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR LONG DATE RAW LONGRAW or ROWID precision of columns and scale if any for a numeric column When you do a DESCRIBE VARCHAR columns are returned with a type of VARCHAR2 8 58 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE The DESCRIBE command allows you to describe objects recursively to the depth level set in the SET DESCRIBE command You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types For more information see the SET command later in this chapter To control the width of the data displayed use the SET LINES
174. cle Server flags them as errors and displays the violating syntax This is the equivalent of the SQL language ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER command You may execute SET FLAGGER even if you are not connected to a database FIPS flagging will remain in effect across SQL Plus sessions until a SET FLAGGER OFF or ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER OFF command is successful or you exit SQL Plus When FIPS flagging is enabled SQL Plus displays a warning for the CONNECT DISCONNECT and ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER commands even if they are successful FLU SH OFF ON Controls when output is sent to the user s display device OFF allows the host operating system to buffer output ON disables buffering Use OFF only when you run a command file non interactively that is when you do not need to see output and or prompts until the command file finishes running The use of FLUSH OFF may improve performance by reducing the amount of program I O HEA DING OFF ON Controls printing of column headings in reports ON prints column headings in reports OFF suppresses column headings The SET HEADING OFF command will not affect the column width displayed and only suppresses the printing of the column header itself Command Reference 8 107 SET HEADS EP c OFF ON Defines the character you enter as the heading separator character The heading separator character cannot be alphanumeric or white space You can use the heading separator character i
175. command 7 2 in START command 8 130 Files command files 3 8 flat 4 36 FLAGGER variable 8 107 Flat file 4 36 FLUSH variable 8 107 FOLD_AFTER clause 8 33 FOLD_BEFORE clause 8 33 Footers aligning elements 8 94 displaying at bottom of page 8 91 displaying system maintained values 8 93 formatting elements 8 94 indenting 8 94 listing current definition 8 91 setting at the end of reports 4 23 suppressing definition 8 94 FORCE clause 8 132 FORMAT clause 8 11 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 20 in COLUMN command 4 5 4 7 8 34 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 8 94 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 29 8 141 Format models number 4 5 8 36 Formfeed to begin a new page 4 33 8 109 FROM clause 8 86 FROM clause SQL Plus 6 5 8 52 G GET command 3 13 8 71 disabling E 5 LIST clause 8 71 modifying command files 3 16 NOLIST clause 8 71 retrieving command files 3 13 8 71 GLOGIN SQL 3 17 3 36 3 40 7 3 GRANT command E 2 disabling E 6 H Headers aligning elements 4 26 displaying at top of page 8 93 displaying system maintained values 8 93 setting at the start of reports 4 23 suppressing 4 25 HEADING clause 4 2 8 36 HEADING variable 8 107 Headings aligning elements 8 94 column headings 8 107 formatting elements 8 94 indenting 8 94 listing current definition 8 95 suppressing definition 8 94 HEADSEP variable 8 108 use in COLUMN command 4 3 8 37 Help command 8 73 Help online
176. control the output Examples To make the ENAME column 20 characters wide and display EMPLOYEE NAME on two lines at the top enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A20 HEADING EMPLOYEE NAME To format the SAL column so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero you would enter SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 9 999 990 99 To assign the alias NET to a column containing a long expression to display the result in a dollar format and to display lt NULL gt for null values you might enter SQL gt COLUMN SAL COMM BONUS EXPENSES INS TAX ALIAS NET SQL gt COLUMN NET FORMAT 9 999 999 99 NULL lt NULL gt Note that the example divides this column specification into two commands The first defines the alias NET and the second uses NET to define the format Also note that in the first command you must enter the expression exactly as you entered it or will enter it in the SELECT command Otherwise SQL Plus cannot match the COLUMN command to the appropriate column To wrap long values in a column named REMARKS you can enter SQL gt COLUMN REMARKS FORMAT A20 WRAP Command Reference 8 39 COLUMN For example F CUSTO ER DAT QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 86 144 This order must be s hipped by air freigh t to ORD If you replace WRAP
177. creen or advance the printer to a new sheet of paper at the start of each page and set the linesize to 32 enter the following commands SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 66 SQL gt SET NEWPAGE 0 SQL gt SET LINESIZE 32 Formatting Query Results 4 33 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Now enter and run the following commands to see the results SQL gt TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 1 gt CENTER 10 JAN 89 SKIP 2 SQL gt COLU DEPTNO HEADING DEPARTMENT SQL gt COLU AME HEADING EMPLOYEE SQL gt COLU SAL FORMAT 99 999 HEADING SALARY SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FRO 3 ORDER BY DEPTINO SQL Plus displays a formfeed followed by the query results ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT 10 JAN 89 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE SALARY 10 CLARK 2 450 10 KING 5 000 10 MILLER 1 300 20 SMITH 800 20 ADAMS 1 100 20 FORD 3 000 20 SCOTT 3 000 20 JONES 2 975 30 ALLEN 1 600 30 BLAKE 2 850 30 MARTIN 1 250 30 JAMES 950 30 TURNER 1 500 30 WARD 1 250 Now reset PAGESIZE NEWPAGE and LINESIZE to their default values SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 24 SQL gt SET NEWPAGE 1 SQL gt SET LINESIZE 80
178. cted by a command and your page size System variables are also called SET command variables The examples in this Guide are based on running SQL Plus with the system variables at their default settings Depending on the settings of your system variables your output may appear slightly different than the output shown in the examples Your settings might differ from the default settings if you have a SQL Plus LOGIN file on your computer For more information on system variables and their default settings see the SET command in Chapter 8 For details on the SQL Plus LOGIN file refer to the section Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment under Saving Commands for Later Use in Chapter 3 and to the SQLPLUS command in Chapter 7 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 13 Entering and Executing Commands To list the current setting of a SET command variable enter SHOW followed by the variable name at the command prompt See the SHOW command in Chapter 8 for information on other items you can list with SHOW Saving Changes to the Database Automatically Through the SQL DML commands UPDATE INSERT and DELETE which can be used independently or within a PL SQL block specify changes you wish to make to the information stored in the database These changes are not made permanent until you enter a SQL COMMIT command or a SQL DCL or DDL command such as CREATE TABLE or use the autocommit feature The SQL Plus autocommit feature causes pending changes
179. d 2 10 8 97 S Sample tables 1 5 access to 1 8 DEMOBLD 1 8 DEMODROP 1 8 SAVE command 3 8 8 98 APPEND clause 3 16 8 98 disabling E 5 modifying command files 3 16 REPLACE clause 3 16 8 98 storing commands in command files 3 8 8 98 using with INPUT to create command files 3 10 Saving environment attributes 8 136 SCAN variable F 5 SCREEN clause 3 30 8 30 Screen clearing 3 30 8 30 Search paths Installation and User s Guide 8 53 Security changing password 8 79 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 SELECT command and BREAK command 4 11 8 22 8 23 and COLUMN command 8 33 and COMPUTE command 4 11 and COPY command 6 6 8 52 and DEFINE command 8 54 and ORDER BY clause 4 11 disabling E 6 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 Index 14 SELECT statement formatting results 3 32 Semicolon in PL SQL blocks 2 10 inSQL commands 2 7 2 8 in SQL Plus commands 2 13 8 1 not needed when inputting a command file 3 10 not stored in buffer 3 3 SERVEROUTPUT variable 8 111 Service Name in COPY command 6 9 Service name in CONNECT command 6 3 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 in SQLPLUS command 6 3 Service names in SQLPLUS command 7 3 SET AUTOTRACE 3 35 SET clause 8 136 SET command 2 13 3 18 8 100 APPINFO variable 8 101 ARRAYSIZE variable 6 8 8 102 AUTOCOMMIT variable 2 14 8 102 AUTOPRINT variable 8 103 8 145 AUTORECOVERY variable 8 103 BLOCKTERMINATOR variable 8 104 BUFFER va
180. d output SET BUFFER Purpose Makes the specified buffer the current buffer Syntax SET BUF FER buffer SQL Usage Notes Initially the SQL buffer is the current buffer SQL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers the SOL buffer alone should meet your needs SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases F 3 SET CLOSECURSOR If the buffer name you enter does not already exist SET BUFFER defines creates and names the buffer SQL Plus deletes the buffer and its contents when you exit SOL Plus Running a query automatically makes the SQL buffer the current buffer To copy text from one buffer to another use the GET and SAVE commands To clear text from the current buffer use CLEAR BUFFER To clear text from the SOL buffer while using a different buffer use CLEAR SQL SET CLOSECURSOR Purpose Sets the cursor usage behavior Syntax SET CLOSECUR SOR OFF ON Usage Notes On or OFF sets whether or not the cursor will close and reopen after each SQL statement This feature may be useful in some circumstances to release resources in the database server SET DOCUMENT Purpose Displays or suppresses blocks of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command Syntax SET DOC UMENT OFF ON Usage Notes SET DOCUMENT ON causes blocks of documentation to be echoed to the screen Set DOCUMENT OFF suppresses the display of blocks of documentation See DOCUMENT in this
181. database tables in Oracle8i using SQL commands you can create and control access to roles By creating a role and then controlling who has access to it you can ensure that only certain users have access to particular database privileges Overview Roles are created and used with the SQL CREATE GRANT and SET commands a Tocreate a role you use the CREATE command You can create roles with or without passwords a To grant access to roles you use the GRANT command In this way you can control who has access to the privileges associated with the role a To access roles you use the SET ROLE command If you created the role with a password the user must know the password in order to access the role For more information about roles see your Oracle8i SQL Reference your Oracle8i Administrator s Guide and your Oracle8i Concepts manual E 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference F SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases This appendix covers earlier versions of some SQL Plus commands These older commands still function within SQL Plus but SQL Plus provides newer commands that have improved functionality SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases F 1 BTITLE old form BTITLE old form Purpose Displays a title at the bottom of each report page Syntax BII TLE text Usage Notes The old form of BTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UF
182. does not print a blank line or formfeed between the report pages NULL text Sets the text that represents a null value in the result of a SQL SELECT command Use the NULL clause of the COLUMN command to override the setting of the NULL variable for a given column NUMF ORMAT format Sets the default format for displaying numbers Enter a number format for format For number format descriptions see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter NUM WIDTH 10 n Sets the default width for displaying numbers For number format descriptions see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter Command Reference 8 109 SET PAGES IZE 24 n Sets the number of lines in each page You can set PAGESIZE to zero to suppress all headings page breaks titles the initial blank line and other formatting information PAU SE OFF ON text Allows you to control scrolling of your terminal when running reports ON causes SQL Plus to pause at the beginning of each page of report output You must press Return after each pause The text you enter specifies the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses If you enter multiple words you must enclose text in single quotes You can embed terminal dependent escape sequences in the PAUSE command These sequences allow you to create inverse video messages or other effects on terminals that support such characteristics RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF RECSEPCHAR _ c Di
183. e Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbos arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Since the log sequence number of the current log group and the next log group to archive are the same automatic archival has archived all log groups up to the current one If you are using ARCHIVELOG but have disabled automatic archiving the last three lines might look like Oldest online log sequence 222 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 225 If you are using NOARCHIVELOG mode the next log sequence to archive line is suppressed Command Reference 8 15 ARCHIVE LOG The log sequence increments every time the Log Writer begins to write to another redo log file group it does not indicate the number of logs being used Every time an online redo log file group is reused the contents are assigned a new log sequence number STOP Disables automatic archival If the instance is still in ARCHIVELOG mode and all redo log file groups fill database operation is suspended until a redo log file is archived for example until you enter the command ARCHIVE LOG NEXT or ARCHIVE LOG ALL START Enables automatic archiving Starts the background process ARCH which performs automatic archiving as required If ARCH is started and a filename is supplied the filename becomes the new default archive destination ARCH automatically starts on instance startup
184. e another through procedural logic table The basic unit of storage in Oracle query A SQL command specifically a SQL SELECT command that retrieves information from one or more tables query results The data retrieved by a query report Query results formatted by you through SQL Plus commands 1 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Overview of SQL Plus Who Can Use SQL Plus The SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL command languages are powerful enough to serve the needs of users with some database experience yet straightforward enough for new users who are just learning to work with Oracle The design of the SQL Plus command language makes it easy to use For example to give a column labelled ENAME in the database the clearer heading Employee you might enter the following command COLUMN ENAME HEADING EMPLOYEE Similarly to list the column definitions for a table called EMP you might enter this command DESCRIBE EMP Other Ways of Working with Oracle Oracle tools for Network Computing Architecture help developers to productively and economically build manage and deploy high performance and robust enterprise applications for Network Computing JDeveloper Suite a 3GL development tool for building component based server centric applications in Java Oracle Enterprise an integrated and flexible set of tools for building Developer Suite enterprise class database applicati
185. e deletes a range of lines m to n DEL n none deletes the current line through line n INPUT I adds one or more lines INPUT text I text adds a line consisting of text LIST L lists all lines in the SQL buffer LIST n Ln or n listslinen LIST L lists the current line 3 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Commands Table 3 1 S QL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose LIST n Ln lists line n through the current line LIST LAST L LAST lists the last line LIST mn Lmn lists a range of lines m to n LIST n L n lists the current line through line n You will find these commands useful if you mistype a command or wish to modify a command you have entered Listing the Buffer Contents Any editing command other than LIST and DEL affects only a single line in the buffer This line is called the current line It is marked with an asterisk when you list the current command or block Example 3 1 Listing the Buffer Contents Suppose you want to list the current command Use the LIST command as shown below If you have EXITed SQL Plus or entered another SQL command or PL SQL block since following the steps in Example 2 3 perform the steps in that example again before continuing SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 Notice that the semicolon you entered at the end of the SELECT command is not listed This
186. e COPY command This is to facilitate copying to DB2 which requires that a CHAR be copied to a DB2 DATE amp c OFF ON Sets the character used to prefix substitution variables to c ON or OFF controls whether SOQL Plus will scan commands for substitution variables and replace them with their values ON changes the value of c back to the default amp not the most recently used character The setting of DEFINE to OFF overrides the setting of the SCAN variable For more Command Reference 8 105 SET information on the SCAN variable see the SET SCAN command in Appendix F DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object The valid range of the DEPTH clause is from 1 to 50 If you SET DESCRIBE DEPTH ALL then the depth will be set to 50 which is the maximum level allowed You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types Use the SET LINESIZE command to control the width of the data displayed For more information about describing objects see the DESCRIBE command earlier in this chapter ECHO OFF ON Controls whether the START command lists each command in a command file as the command is executed ON lists the commands OFF suppresses the listing EDITF ILE file_name ext Sets the default filename for the EDIT command For more information about th
187. e EDIT command SQL gt EDIT EDIT loads the contents of the buffer into your system s default text editor You can then edit the text with the text editor s commands When you tell the text editor to save edited text and then exit the text is loaded back into the buffer To load the buffer contents into a text editor other than the default use the SOL Plus DEFINE command to define a variable EDITOR to hold the name of the editor For example to define the editor to be used by EDIT as EDT enter the following command SQL gt DEFINE _EDITOR EDT You can also define the editor to be used by EDIT in your user or site profile See Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment later in this chapter and the DEFINE and EDIT commands in Chapter 8 for more information Manipulating Commands 3 7 Saving Commands for Later Use Saving Commands for Later Use Through SQL Plus you can store one or more commands ina file called a command file After you create a command file you can retrieve edit and run it Use command files to save commands for use over time especially complex commands or PL SQL blocks Storing Commands in Command Files You can store one or more SQL commands PL SQL blocks and SQL Plus commands in command files You create a command file within SQL Plus in one of three ways enter a command and save the contents of the buffer a use INPUT to enter commands and then save the buffer contents a
188. e EDIT command see EDIT in this chapter You can include a path and or file extension For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of this command The default filename and maximum filename length are operating system specific EMB EDDED OFF ON Controls where on a page each report begins OFF forces each report to start at the top of a new page ON allows a report to begin anywhere on a page Set EMBEDDED to ON when you want a report to begin printing immediately following the end of the previously run report ESC APE c OFF ON Defines the character you enter as the escape character OFF undefines the escape character ON enables the escape character ON changes the value of c back to the default You can use the escape character before the substitution character set through SET DEFINE to indicate that SQL Plus should treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution 8 106 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET FEED BACK 6 n OFF ON Displays the number of records returned by a query when a query selects at least n records ON or OFF turns this display on or off Turning feedback ON sets n to 1 Setting feedback to zero is equivalent to turning it OFF FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL Checks to make sure that SQL statements conform to the ANSI ISO SQL92 standard If any non standard constructs are found the Ora
189. e EMP 1 On the command line enter this SQL Plus command SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 999 HEADING SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you have entered the line press Return SQL Plus notes the new format and displays the SQL Plus command prompt again ready for a new command 2 Enter the RUN command to re run the most recent query from Example 2 3 SQL Plus reprocesses the query and displays the results SQL gt RU 1 SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 EMPNO ENAME JOB SALARY 7369 SMITH CLERK 800 7499 ALLE SALESMAN 1 600 7521 WARD SALESMAN 1 250 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 1 250 7782 CLARK MANAGER 2 450 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 1 500 7876 ADAMS CLERK 1 100 7900 JAMES CLERK 800 7934 MILLER CLERK 1 300 The COLUMN command formatted the column SAL with a dollar sign and a comma and gave it a new heading The RUN command then re ran the query of Example 2 3 which was stored in the buffer SQL Plus does not store SQL Plus commands in the SQL buffer Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax SQL Plus commands have a different syntax from SQL commands or PL SQL blocks Continuing a Long SQL Plus Command on Additional Lines You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish
190. e Oracle8i Backup and Recovery guide Examples To recover the entire database enter SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE To recover the database until a specified time enter SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 23 NOV 98 04 32 00 To recover the two tablespaces ts_one and ts_two from the database enter SQL gt RECOVER TABLESPACE ts_one ts_two To recover the datafile datal db from the database enter SQL gt RECOVER DATAFILE datal db Command Reference 8 89 REMARK REMARK Purpose Begins a comment in a command file SQL Plus does not interpret the comment as a command Syntax REM ARK Usage Notes The REMARK command must appear at the beginning of a line and the comment ends at the end of the line A line cannot contain both a comment and a command For details on entering comments in command files using the SQL comment delimiters or the ANSI ISO comment delimiter refer to Placing Comments in Command Files in Chapter 3 Example The following command file contains some typical comments REM COMPUTE uses BREAK ON REPORT to break on end of table BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF DEPARTMENT 10 DEPARTMENT 20 DEPARTMENT 30 TOTAL BY JOB ON R
191. e VERIFY back to ON SQL gt SET VERIFY ON Restrictions You cannot use substitution variables in the buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE DEL and INPUT nor in other commands where substitution would be meaningless such as REMARK The buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE and INPUT treat text beginning with amp or amp amp literally as any other text string System Variables The following system variables specified with the SQL Plus SET command affect substitution variables SET DEFINE Defines the substitution character by default the ampersand amp and turns substitution on and off SET ESCAPE Defines an escape character you can use before the substitution character The escape character instructs SQL Plus to treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution The default escape character is a backslash SET VERIFY ON Lists each line of the command file before and after substitution SET CONCAT Defines the character that separates the name of a substitution variable or parameter from characters that immediately follow the variable or parameter by default the period For more information about system variables see the SET command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Passing Parameters through the START Command You can bypass the prompts for values associated with substitutio
192. e character set is used one CHAR may be more than one byte in size Makes reply a valid DATE format If the reply is not a valid DATE format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again The datatype is CHAR Specifies the input format for the reply If the reply does not match the specified format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again for a reply The format element must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 See the COLUMN command in this chapter for a complete list of format elements Oracle date formats such as dd mm yy are valid when the datatype is DATE DATE without a specified format defaults to the Oracle NLS_ DATE_FORMAT of the current session See the Oracle8i Administrator s Command Reference 8 11 ACCEPT Guide and the Oracle8i SQL Reference for information on Oracle date formats DEF AULT Sets the default value if a reply is not given The reply must be in the specified format if defined PROMPT text Displays text on screen before accepting the value of variable from the user NOPR OMPT Skips a line and waits for input without displaying a prompt HIDE Suppresses the display as you type the reply To display or reference variables use the DEFINE command See the DEFINE command in this chapter for more information Examples To display the prompt Password place the reply in a CHAR variable named PSWD and suppress the display enter SQL gt ACCEPT pswd CHAR
193. e format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Refer to the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter for more information on default formats Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list the current TTITLE definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text TTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets TTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name See COLUMN NEW_VALUE for information on printing column and DATE values in the top title You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it The length of the title you specify with TTITLE cannot exceed 2400 characters The continuation character a hyphen will not be recognized inside a single quoted title text string To be recognized the continuation character must appear outside the quotes as follows SQL gt TTITLE CENTER Summary Repo
194. e if the destination table does not exist APPEND specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe table does not already exist COPY creates the table and then inserts the copied data in it Example 6 1 Copying from a Remote Database to Your Local Database Using CREATE To copy EMP from a remote database into a table called EMPCOPY on your own database enter the following command Note See your DBA for an appropriate username password and service name for a remote computer that contains a copy of EMP SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt CREATE EMPCOPY gt USING SELECT FROM EMP SQL Plus displays the following messages Array fetch bind size is 20 arraysize is 20 Will commit when done copycommit is 0 Maximum long size is 80 long is 80 Accessing SQL Databases 6 7 Copying Data from One Database to Another SQL Plus then creates the table EMPCOPY copies the rows and displays the following additional messages Table EMPCOPY created 14 rows selected from SCOTT BOSTONDB 14 rows inserted into EMPCOPY 14 rows committed into EMPCOPY at DEFAULT HOST connection In this COPY command the FROM clause directs COPY to connect you to the database with the specification D BOSTON MFG as SCOTT with the password T
195. e in the column AVG Computes the average of the values in the column STD Computes the standard deviation of the values in the column VARIANCE Computes the variance of the values in the column COUNT Computes the number of non null values in the column NUMBER Computes the number of rows in the column The function you specify in the COMPUTE command applies to all columns you enter after OFF and before ON The computed values print on a separate line when the value of the ordered column changes Labels for ON REPORT and ON ROW computations appear in the first column otherwise they appear in the column specified in the ON clause You can change the compute label by using COMPUTE LABEL If you do not define a label for the computed value SOL Plus prints the unabbreviated function keyword The compute label can be suppressed by using the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column See the COMPUTE command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 12 Computing and Printing Subtotals To compute the total of SAL by department first list the current BREAK definition SQL gt BREAK break on DEPTNO skip 0 page nodup on JOB skip 1 nodup Formatting Query Results 4 17 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Now enter the following COMPUTE command and run the current query SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output
196. e instance if it is running with SHUTDOWN mode ABORT before restarting it If the current instance is running and FORCE is not specified an error results FORCE is useful while debugging and under abnormal circumstances It should not normally be used RESTRICT Only allows Oracle users with the RESTRICTED SESSION system privilege to connect to the database Later you can use the ALTER SYSTEM command to disable the restricted session feature PFILE filename Causes the specified parameter file to be used while starting up the instance MOUNT Mounts a database but does not open it OPEN Mounts and opens the specified database 8 132 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP NOMOUNT Causes the database not to be mounted upon instance startup Cannot be used with SHARED EXCLUSIVE PARALLEL MOUNT or OPEN RECOVER Specifies that media recovery should be performed if necessary before starting the instance STARTUP RECOVER has the same effect as issuing the RECOVER DATABASE command and starting an instance Only complete recovery is possible with the RECOVER option Recovery proceeds if necessary as if AUTORECOVERY is set to ON regardless of whether or not AUTORECOVERY is enabled If a redo log file is not found in the expected location recovery continues as if AUTORECOVERY is disabled by prompting you with the suggested location and name of the subsequent log files that need to be applied If recovery fails usi
197. e to Another Copying Data between Tables on One Database Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the example shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Accessing SQL Databases 6 1 Connecting to the Default Database Connecting to the Default Database In order to access data in a given database you must first connect to the database When you start SQL Plus you normally connect to your default Oracle database under the username and password you enter while starting Once you have logged in you can connect under a different username with the SQL Plus CONNECT command The username and password must be valid for the database For example to connect the username TODD to the default database using the password FOX you could enter SQL gt CONNECT TODD FOX If you omit the username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them You also have the option of typing only the username following CONNECT and omitting the password SQL Plus then prompts for the password Because CONNECT first disconnects you from your current database you will be left unconnected to any database if you use an invalid username and password in your CONNECT command If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permit
198. ected The function can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable SQL gt EXECUTE rc dept_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed SQL gt PRINT rc DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Tracing Statements You can automatically get a report on the execution path used by the SQL optimizer and the statement execution statistics The report is generated after successful SQL DML that is SELECT DELETE UPDATE and INSERT statements It is useful for monitoring and tuning the performance of these statements Controlling the Report You can control the report by setting the AUTOTRACE system variable SET AUTOTRACE OFF No AUTOTRACE report is generated This is the default Manipulating Commands 3 35 Tracing Statements SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN The AUTOTRACE report shows only the optimizer execution path SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report shows only the SQL STATISTICS statement execution statistics SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report includes both the optimizer execution path and the SQL statement execution statistics SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY Like SET AUTOTRACE ON but suppresses the printing of the user s query output if any To use this feature you must have the PLUSTRACE role granted to you a
199. ed for a table table alias A temporary substitute name for a table defined in a query and only good during that query If used an alias is set in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement and may appear in the SELECT list See also alias text editor A program run under your host computer s operating system that you use to create and edit host system files and SQL Plus command files containing SOL commands SOL Plus commands and or PL SQL blocks timer An internal storage area created by the TIMING command title One or more lines that appears at the top or bottom of each report page You establish and format titles through the TTITLE and BTITLE commands transaction A logical unit of work that comprises one or more SQL statements executed by a single user According to the ANSI ISO SQL standard with which Oracle is compatible a transaction begins with the user s first executable SQL statement A transaction ends when it is explicitly committed or rolled back by the user truncate To discard or lose one or more characters from the beginning or end of a value whether intentionally or unintentionally type A column contains information in one of four types character date number or long The operations users can perform on the contents of a column depend on the type of information it contains See also format Glossary 23 Glossary 24 USERID A command line argument that allows you to specify your Oracle usern
200. efault justification for datatypes is left justification 4 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns Changing the Default Display You can change the displayed width of a datatype or DATE by using the COLUMN command with a format model consisting of the letter A for alphanumeric followed by a number representing the width of the column in characters Within the COLUMN command identify the column you want to format and the model you want to use COLUMN column_name FORMAT model If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading If you specify a width for a LONG CLOB or NCLOB column SQL Plus uses the LONGCHUNKSIZE or the specified width whichever is smaller as the column width See the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 5 Formatting a Character Column To set the width of the column ENAME to four characters and rerun the current query enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A4 SQL gt SQL Plus displays the results Empl Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1 600 300 N 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MART 1 250 1400 IN 30 TURN 1 500 0 ER Note The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format or exit from SQL Plus ENAME could be a CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR or NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING column Formatting Query Results 4 7 Formatting Colu
201. egistered trademarks of Oracle Corporation All other company or product names mentioned are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners Contents Preface tee eee A ete OL a eee OR Ts Pag DE in Oe are xi Send US Your Comments o iooicccccccccccccccccccccccssescsessecscscsesccecscececsusscsesesucecscscssucacscsessscavavsneececsese xvii Part Understanding SQL Plus Introduction Overview Of SQL Plus esicsc2e5 cccsacc sic fecescciastta sce shcakee aaaea ea ake sk a eat aa Aaaa aa aa aiaeeiiee 1 2 Basic Concepts eisin eies a an a as bo oulba moins het 1 2 Who Can Use SQL Plus sx si cteisdneiehaiivi siete ind aa aa aaa a a lane a Et 1 3 Other Ways of Working with Oracle ssnssssseessssiesessssssestsssessestesiestestenentestesnesnententesnesnentente 1 3 Using this Guide sosser noe Aae e E Era A E E e E 1 4 Conventions for Command Syntax c cccccccccsseseccscssseseecsccsseeecscsssseseecscssssssecssssssseeeceeesen 1 4 Sample Tables seassa a a ON a E E REANA 1 5 What You Need to Run SQL Plus 0 ce ceeceeseesceessceseesecseeececceseeeseceecaceaeesecnecaeeseeseeaeeeeeseeaeaseneees 1 7 Hardware atid Sottware sisesma een tail Sheil aa aa aai e N 1 7 Information Specific to Your Operating System sssss ssssssssssieriestesressestestessesnententesresnestente 1 7 Us rnaitne and PassWord ormsriisai ioan i eiiie e bee ee a a a a E E iani 1 7 Aceessto Sample Fables anieinie nnie e E
202. em System Global Area SGA A shared storage area that contains information required by user processes and background processes such as data and control information for one Oracle instance The SGA is allocated when an Oracle instance is started and is deallocated when the instance shuts down SYSTEM username One of two standard DBA usernames automatically created with each database the other is SYS The Oracle user SYSTEM is created with the password MANAGER The SYSTEM username is the preferred username for DBAs to use when performing database maintenance system variable A variable that indicates status or environment which is given a default value by Oracle or SQL Plus Examples are LINESIZE and PAGESIZE Use the SQL Plus commands SHOW and SET to see and alter system variables table The basic unit of storage in a relational database management system A table represents entities and relationships and consists of one or more units of information rows each of which contains the same kinds of values columns Each column is given a column name a datatype such as CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 NVARCHAR2 DATE or NUMBER and a width the width may be predetermined by the datatype as in DATE Once a table is created valid rows of data can be inserted into it Table information can then be queried deleted or updated To enforce defined business rules on a table s data integrity constraints and triggers can also be defin
203. ement DATAFILE datafilename Recovers a particular datafile You can specify any number of datafiles STANDBY TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE datafilename datafilename Reconstructs a lost or damaged datafile or tablespace in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file UNTIL CONTROLFILE Specifies that the recovery of an old standby datafile or tablespace uses the current standby database control file LOGFILE filename Continues media recovery by applying the specified redo log file CONTINUE DEFAULT Continues multi instance recovery after it has been interrupted to disable a thread Continues recovery using the redo log file that Oracle would automatically generate if no other logfile were specified This option is equivalent to specifying AUTOMATIC except that Oracle does not prompt for a filename CANCEL Terminates cancel based recovery PARALLEL DEGREE integer Specifies the number of recovery processes used to apply redo entries to datafiles on each instance An integer specified for DEGREE overrides the initialization parameter RECOVERY_PARALLELISM PARALLEL DEGREE DEFAULT Indicates that twice the number of datafiles being recovered is the number of recovery processes to use Command Reference 8 87 RECOVER PARALLEL INSTANCES integer Specifies the number of instances to use for parallel recovery The number of recovery p
204. ement that retrieves data in any combination expression or order Queries are read only operations they do not change any data they only retrieve data Queries are often considered to be DML statements query results The data retrieved by a query RAW datatype A standard Oracle datatype a RAW data column may contain data in any form including binary You can use RAW columns for storing binary non character data RDBMS Relational Database Management System An Oracle7 and earlier term Refers to the software used to create and maintain the system as well as the actual data stored in the database See also Relational Database Management System RDBMS Server Oracle Server and Oracle RDBMS record A synonym for row one row of data in a database table having values for one or more columns Glossary 17 Glossary 18 redo log A sequential log of all changes made to the data The redo log is written and used in the event of a failure that prevents changes from being written to disk The redo log consists of two or more redo log files redo log file A file containing records of all changes made to the database These files are used for recovery purposes See also redo log Relational Database Management System RDBMS An Oracle7 and earlier term A computer program designed to store and retrieve shared data In a relational system data is stored in tables consisting of one or more rows each containing the same set
205. enasna 5 5 6 Accessing SQL Databases Connecting to the Default Database 0 0 cccee eee ces eseseeseseseesseeesesessssesesesesssesesesesesesesesssees 6 2 Connecting to a Remote Database cccceccccsseseseesesesssssesesesessssesesesssessesesesssssesesesesesssesesssees 6 2 Connecting to a Remote Database from within SQL PIUS c cece eseteseseseeneeesees 6 3 Connecting to a Remote Database as You Start SQL PIUS 0 eee eee tees eeneneeeeeees 6 3 Copying Data from One Database to Amothet 0 ccceecccesseseeseseneesssesesesessesesesesssssesesesens 6 4 Understanding COPY Command Syntax ccccccccccceseccccseseecscseseseseecscsssnsescscscsnsnseeseessen 6 5 Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table 0 0 0 0 cece cesses ee seeseeeeeeseneeesseeseseseneenes 6 6 Interpreting the Messages that COPY Display ccccccccees cs cseesssessessssescsesesesescseseecseees 6 8 Specifying Another User s Table c cccccccccsssssesescscssesescscscsssesescscsssnseseececsssnseesecscsnsnsneceeesens 6 8 Copying Data between Tables on One Database ccccccseeeceesseseseseecenesesesnseeseseeceeseeesnans 6 9 Part Il Reference 7 Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help Starting SOL Plus Using the SOLPLUS Command cet tener ne netenseeneanee 7 2 Setting Up the Site Profile niscnctiin sunk aihin mat ten iad ea anai i E ENEN Ea EL ri 7 3 petting Upithe User Profil Ereren eea aeee tends Socata sues Pan E EEA 7 4
206. ence only Each description contains the following parts Purpose Discusses the basic use s of the command Syntax Shows how to enter the command Refer to Chapter 1 for an explanation of the syntax notation Terms and Describes the function of each term or clause appearing in the Clauses syntax Usage Notes Provides additional information on how the command works and on uses of the command Examples Gives one or more examples of the command A summary table that lists and briefly describes SQL Plus commands precedes the individual command descriptions You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of a SQL Plus command Command Reference 8 1 SQL Plus Command Summary SQL Plus Command Summary Command Description Runs the specified command file ee Runs a command file Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block ACCEPT Reads a line of input and stores it in a given user variable APPEND Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the buffer ARCHIVE LOG Starts or stops the automatic
207. ent in a command file EPFOOTER Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition EPHEADER Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition RUN Lists and executes the SOL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer SAVE Saves the contents of the SQL buffer in a host operating system file a command file SET Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment for your current session SHOW Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the current SQL Plus environment SHUTDOWN Shuts down a currently running Oracle instance optionally closing and dismounting the database SPOOL Stores query results in an operating system file and optionally sends the file to a printer STAR Executes the contents of the specified command file STARTUP Starts an Oracle instance with several options including mounting and opening a database STORE Saves attributes of the current SOL Plus environment in a host operating system file a command file TIMING Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s title and timing data or lists the number of active timers TTITLE Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page or lists the current TTITLE definition UNDEF INE Deletes one or more user variables that you defined either 8 4 SQL Pl
208. er commands use a common command syntax and a common set of sample tables Both are described below You will find the conventions for command syntax particularly useful when referring to the Command Reference of this Guide Conventions for Command Syntax The following two tables describe the notation and conventions for command syntax used in this Guide Table 1 1 Commands Terms and Clauses Feature Example Explanation uppercase BIITLE Enter text exactly as spelled it need not be in uppercase lowercase italics column A clause value substitute an appropriate value words with c A single character specific meanings char A CHAR value a literal in single quotes or an expression with a CHAR value d ore A date or an expression with a DATE value expr An unspecified expression 1 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using this Guide Table 1 1 Commands Terms and Clauses Feature Example Explanation morn A number or an expression with a NUMBER value text A CHAR constant with or without single quotes variable A user variable unless the text specifies another variable type Other words are explained where used if their meaning is not explained by context Table 1 2 Punctuation Feature Example Explanation vertical bar brackets OFF ON braces OFF ON underlining OFF ON ellipsis Hes Separates alternative syntax elements that may be optional or mandatory
209. es Net8 connect strings The maximum length of the instance path is 64 characters LIN ESIZE 80 n Sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line It also controls the position of centered and right aligned text in TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER You can define LINESIZE as a value from 1 to a maximum that is system dependent Refer to the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system 8 108 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET LOBOF FSET n 1 Sets the starting position from which CLOB and NCLOB data is retrieved and displayed LOGSOURCE pathname Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The default value is set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST initialization parameter Using the SET LOGSOURCE command without a pathname restores the default location LONG 80 n Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying LONG CLOB and NCLOB values and for copying LONG values The maximum value of n is 2 gigabytes LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n Sets the size in bytes of the increments in which SQL Plus retrieves a LONG CLOB or NCLOB value NEWP AGE 1 n NONE Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title A value of zero places a formfeed at the beginning of each page including the first page and clears the screen on most terminals If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus
210. esesesesnetenees 4 23 Displaying the Page Number and other System Maintained Values in Titles 4 28 Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions 0 cc cesses seneteeeeees 4 30 Displaying Column Values in Titles 00 ccc cece ceeseececeseeeseeeseseseseeesesesesesenesesesenens 4 30 Displaying the Current Date in Titles eee cesses serseesseesesesessesesesesssseeseseseseseenees 4 32 Setting Page Dimensions ccccscseseseseseesescsesesenseseecsesseececsssessssesesessseecscnssesessesesenseeesseneeeess 4 32 Sending Results toa Piles cn ccsssetscedsstscseceilbicetvesatinschseveseseabsisiuesvabassends Ser ap aa ta 4 35 Storing and Printing Query Results cece ceeseseeeesenesssseesesessssseesesesssssesesesesessseseeess 4 35 Creating a Flat Fil ds issaraen o a aaa aaa a as aS 4 36 Sending Results toa Printet e e ee a a E Er 4 36 5 Database Administration OVEN EW eena a ial E EAA A 5 2 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown ss sssssssssesisseeseessestestesenssesientessesnesneneeneens 5 2 Database Startups esemane eateries taht A eres dared aea aa a EEE aE E EE TAEA 5 2 Database Sh tdOWTi an 2isvelieisescstisset aE ERE E Eia E TEER 5 3 Redo Log Pilesics ce csis as cin ee ah ce eit te 5 ests ees is de E N a OE E 5 4 ARCHIVELOG Mode sc sccessesicsecehie scuttith cs suesessbgdiesitessosags testa svlvisslesbete eaa aaraa laia a EE 5 4 Database Recovery sison ean inaa os aa ansias n i paies
211. example shows the use of PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT ina command file called ASKFORDEPT ASKFORDEPT contains the following SQL Plus and SQL commands RO Please enter a valid department For example 10 20 30 40 EWDEPT BER PROMPT DEPT gt DNAME FROM DEPT E DEPTNO amp NEWDEPT D U ty ty 6 Q Q Quy n TE Assume you run the file using START or SQL gt QASKFORDEPT SQL Plus displays the following prompts Please enter a valid department For example 10 20 30 40 DEPT gt Command Reference 8 83 PROMPT You can enter a department number at the prompt DEPT gt By default SQL Plus lists the line containing amp NEWDEPT before and after substitution and then displays the department name corresponding to the number entered at the DEPT gt prompt 8 84 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER RECOVER Purpose Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database Syntax RECOVER Al UTOMATIC FROM location STANDBY DATABASE UNTIL options USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE datafilename datafilename STANDBY TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE datafilename datafilena
212. fication in the CONNECT command in one of the following forms the username and password you enter must be valid for the database to which you wish to connect m CONNECT SCOTT net_service_nam n CONNECT SCOTT TIGER net_service_nam SQL Plus prompts you for a password as needed and connects you to the specified database This database becomes the default database until you CONNECT again to another database DISCONNECT or leave SOL Plus If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA When you connect to a remote database in this manner you can use the complete range of SOL and SQL Plus commands and PL SQL blocks on the database The exact string you enter for the service name depends upon the Net8 protocol your computer uses For more information see CONNECT in Chapter 8 and the Net8 manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA Connecting to a Remote Database as You Start SQL Plus To connect to a remote database when you start SQL Plus include the Net8 service name in your SOQLPLUS command in one of the following forms C SQLPLUS SCOTT net_service_nam n SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER net_service_nam Accessing SQL Databases 6 3 Copying Data from One Database t
213. ge Therefore SKIP PAGE may not always cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Note also that if there is a break after the last row of data to be printed in a report SQL Plus will not skip the page NODUP LICATES Prints blanks rather than the value of a break column when the value is a duplicate of the column s value in the preceding row DUP LICATES Prints the value of a break column in every selected row Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current break definition Usage Notes Each new BREAK command you enter replaces the preceding one To remove the BREAK command use CLEAR BREAKS Example To produce a report that prints duplicate job values prints the average of SAL and inserts one blank line when the value of JOB changes and additionally prints the sum of SAL and inserts another blank line when the value of DEPTNO changes you could enter the following commands The example selects departments 10 and 30 and the jobs of clerk and salesman only SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP 1 ON JOB SKIP 1 DUPLICATES SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO SQL gt COMPUTE AVG OF SAL ON JOB SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL FROM EMP 2 WHERE JOB IN CLERK SALESMAN AND DEPTNO IN 10 30 4 ORDER BY DEPINO JOB 8 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK The
214. ge these settings to match the size of your computer screen or for printing the size of a sheet of paper You can change the page length with the system variable PAGESIZE For example you may wish to do so when you print a report since printed pages are customarily 66 lines long To set the number of lines between the beginning of each page and the top title use the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command SET NEWPAGE number_of_lines If you set NEWPAGE to zero SQL Plus skips zero lines and displays and prints a formfeed character to begin a new page On most types of computer screens the formfeed character clears the screen and moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line When you print a report the formfeed character makes the printer move to the top of a new sheet of paper even if the overall page length is less than that of the paper If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between report pages To set the number of lines on a page use the PAGESIZE variable of the SET command SET PAGESIZE number_of_lines You may wish to reduce the linesize to center a title properly over your output or you may want to increase linesize for printing on wide paper You can change the line width using the LINESIZE variable of the SET command SET LINESIZE number_of_characters Example 4 24 Setting Page Dimensions To set the page size to 66 lines clear the s
215. ger 7698 ENAME SAL DEPTNO ALLE 1600 30 WARD 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ARTIN 1250 30 JAMES 950 30 lanager 7839 ENAME SAL DEPTNO JONES 2975 20 BLAKE 2850 30 CLARK 2450 10 If you want to print the value of a column at the bottom of the page you can use the COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OLD_VALUE variable_name SQL Plus prints the bottom title as part of the process of breaking to a new page after finding the new value for the master column Therefore if you simply referenced the NEW_VALUE of the master column you would get the value for the next set of details OLD_VALUE remembers the value of the master column that was in effect before the page break began Formatting Query Results 4 31 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Displaying the Current Date in Titles You can of course date your reports by simply typing a value in the title This is satisfactory for ad hoc reports but if you want to run the same report repeatedly you would probably prefer to have the date automatically appear when the report is run You can do this by creating a variable to hold the current date To create the variable in this example named _DATE you can add the following commands to your SQL Plus LOGIN file SET TERMOUT OFF BREAK ON TODAY COLUMN TODAY NEW VALUE _DATE SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE fmMonth DD YYYY TODAY F C S ROM DUAL EAR BREAKS ET
216. has the same name as that user security level The combination of a hierarchical classification and a set of non hierarchical compartments that represent the sensitivity of information select To fetch rows from one or more database tables using a query the SQL statement SELECT SELECT list The list of items that follow the keyword SELECT in a query These items may include column names SQL functions constants pseudo columns calculations on columns and aliases The number of columns in the result of the query will match the number of items in the SELECT list SELECT statement A SQL statement that specifies which rows and columns to fetch from one or more tables or views See also SQL statement Server Oracle software that handles the functions required for concurrent shared data access to an Oracle database The server portion receives and processes SQL and PL SQL statements originating from client applications The computer that manages the server portion must be optimized for its duties Glossary 19 Glossary 20 session The time after a username connects to an Oracle database and before disconnecting and the events that happen in that time SET command variable See system variable SGA See also System Global Area SGA spooling Sending or saving output to a disk storage area Often used in order to print or transfer files The SQL Plus SPOOL command controls spooling SQL Structured Query Language T
217. hat defines which database column s are retrieved It may be a column name or a valid SQL expression referencing a column name column heading A heading created for each column appearing in a report command An instruction to or request of a program application operating system or other software to perform a particular task Commands may be single words or may require additional phrases variously called arguments options parameters and qualifiers Unlike statements commands execute as soon as you enter them ACCEPT CLEAR and COPY are examples of commands in SQL Plus command file A file containing a sequence of commands that you can otherwise enter interactively The file is saved for convenience and re execution Command files are often called by operating system specific names In SQL Plus you can execute the command file with the START or commands command line A line on a computer display on which typed in commands appear An example of a command line is the area next to the DOS prompt on a personal computer See also prompt command prompt The text by default SQL gt with which SQL Plus requests your next command comment A language construct for the inclusion of explanatory text in a program the execution of which remains unaffected Glossary 5 Glossary 6 commit To make permanent changes to data inserts updates deletes in the database Before changes are committed both the old and new da
218. he Database To shut down the database in normal mode once it has been opened and mounted enter SQL gt SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted ORACLE instance shut down Database Administration 5 3 Redo Log Files Redo Log Files Every Oracle database has a set of two or more redo log files The set of redo log files for a database is collectively referred to as the database s redo log The redo log is used to record changes made to data If for example there is a database failure the redo log is used to recover the database To protect against a failure involving the redo log itself Oracle allows a mirrored redo log so that two or more copies of the redo log can be maintained on different disks ARCHIVELOG Mode Operating a database in ARCHIVELOG mode enables the archiving of the online redo log The ARCHIVELOG command permits a complete recovery from disk failure as well as instance failure because all changes made to the database are permanently saved in an archived redo log For more information about redo log files and database archiving modes see the Oracle8i Concepts manual For information about using the ARCHIVE LOG command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To automatically begin archiving enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG START To list the details of the current log file being archived enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG LIST SQL Plus displays results similar to the following Dat
219. he command and the PL SQL statement cannot exceed the length defined by SET LINESIZE Examples The following EXECUTE command assigns a value to a bind variable SQL gt EXECUTE n 1 The following EXECUTE command runs a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure SQL gt EXECUTE gt ID EMP_MANAGEMENT HIRE BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES Note that the value returned by the stored procedure is being placed in a bind variable ID For information on how to create a bind variable see the VARIABLE command in this chapter 8 68 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXIT EXIT Purpose Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system Syntax EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT QUIT Can be used interchangeably QUIT is a synonym for EXIT SUCCESS Exits normally FAILURE Exits with a return code indicating failure WARNING Exits with a return code indicating warning COMMIT Saves pending changes to the database before exiting n Represents an integer you specify as the return code variable Represents a user defined or system variable but not a bind variable such as SOL SQLCODE EXIT variable exits with the value of variable as the return code BindVariable
220. he cursor variable SQL gt BEGI 2 OPEN dept_sel FOR SELECT FROM DEPT 3 ND 4 PL SQL procedure successfully completed N amp The results from the SELECT statement can now be displayed in SQL Plus with the PRINT command SQL gt PRINT dept_sel DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON The PRINT statement also closes the cursor To reprint the results the PL SQL block must be executed again before using PRINT Example 3 19 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Procedures A REFCURSOR bind variable is passed as a parameter to a procedure The parameter has a REF CURSOR type First define the type SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE cv_types AS 2 TYPE DeptCurTyp is REF CURSOR RETURN dept ROWTYPE 3 END cv_types 4 Package created Next create the stored procedure containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE dept_rpt 2 dept_cv IN OUT cv_types DeptCurTyp AS 3 BEGI 4 OPEN dept_cv FOR SELECT FROM DEPT 5 END 6 Procedure successfully completed Manipulating Commands 3 33 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Execute the procedure with a SQL Plus bind variable as the parameter SQL gt VARIABLE odcv REFCURSOR SQL g
221. he following topics Editing Commands Saving Commands for Later Use Writing Interactive Commands Using Bind Variables Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Tracing Statements Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Manipulating Commands 3 1 Editing Commands Editing Commands Because SQL Plus does not store SQL Plus commands in the buffer you edit a SQL Plus command entered directly to the command prompt by using Backspace or by re entering the command You can use a number of SQL Plus commands to edit the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Alternatively you can use a host operating system editor to edit the buffer contents Table 3 1 lists the SQL Plus commands that allow you to examine or change the command in the buffer without re entering the command Table 3 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose APPEND text A text adds text at the end of a line CHANGE old new C old new changes old to new in a line CHANGE text C text deletes text from a line CLEAR BUFFER CL BUFF deletes all lines DEL none deletes the current line DEL n none deletes line n DEL none deletes the current line DEL n none deletes line n through the current line DEL LAST none deletes the last line DEL mn non
222. he internationally accepted standard for relational systems covering not only query but also data definition manipulation security and some aspects of referential integrity See also Data Manipulation Language DML Data Definition Language DDL and Data Control Language DCL SQL buffer The default buffer containing your most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer SQL command See SQL statement SQL script A file containing SQL statements that you can run in SQL Plus to perform database administration quickly and easily SQL statement A complete command or statement written in the SQL language Synonymous with statement SQL SQL Loader An Oracle tool used to load data from operating system files into Oracle database tables SQL Net Net8 s precursor An Oracle product that works with the Oracle Server and enables two or more computers that run the Oracle RDBMS or Oracle tools such as SQL Forms to exchange data through a network SQL Net supports distributed processing and distributed database capability SQL Net runs over and interconnects many communications protocols SQL Plus An interactive SQL based language for data manipulation data definition and the definition of access rights for an Oracle database Often used as an end user reporting tool statement SQL A SQL statement and analogous to a complete sentence as opposed to a phrase Portions of SQL
223. here logon requires the following syntax username password net_service_name Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause username password Represent the username and password with which you wish to connect to Oracle If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you enter a slash or simply enter Return to the prompt for username SQL Plus logs you in using a default logon see below If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen See the PASSWORD command in this chapter for information about changing your password net_service_name Consists of a Net8 connection string The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol your Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA SQL Plus does not prompt for a service name but uses your default database if you do not include a specification Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a net_service_name if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username See the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication Command Reference 8 49 CONNE
224. holds the database runs the ORACLE Server kernel is not a MS DOS PC or Macintosh but could be an OS 2 PC and runs a multitask operating system database specification An alphanumeric code that identifies a database used to specify the database in Net8 operations and to define a database link In SQL Plus you can reference a database specification in a COPY CONNECT or SQLPLUS command database string A string of Net8 parameters used to indicate the network prefix the host system you want to connect to and the system ID of the database on the host system Glossary 7 Glossary 8 Data Control Language DCL The category of SQL statements that control access to the data and to the database Examples are the GRANT and REVOKE statements Occasionally DCL statements are grouped with DML statements Data Definition Language DDL The category of SQL statements that define or delete database objects such as tables or views Examples are the CREATE ALTER and DROP statements data dictionary A comprehensive set of tables and views automatically created and updated by the Oracle database server which contains administrative information about users data storage and privileges It is installed when Oracle is initially installed and is a central source of information for the Oracle database server itself and for all users of Oracle The tables are automatically maintained by Oracle It is sometimes referred to as the catalog Data
225. hyphen continuing a long SQL Plus command 2 12 8 1 hyphen clause 7 3 period 2 10 slash command 8 10 entered at buffer line number prompt 2 8 8 10 entered at command prompt 2 10 8 10 executing current PL SQL block 2 11 executing current SQL command 2 10 similar to RUN 2 10 8 10 8 97 slash default logon 7 3 8 49 Pound sign 8 36 number format 4 5 amp ampersand substitution variables 3 20 asterisk in DEL command 3 2 8 56 in LIST command 3 2 8 77 comment delimiters 3 12 colon bind variables 3 30 BindVariable clause EXIT command 8 69 semicolon 2 7 clause 7 3 at sign in CONNECT command 6 3 8 49 in COPY command 6 5 8 51 in SQLPLUS command 3 15 6 3 7 2 at sign command 3 14 3 18 8 6 arguments 8 6 command file 3 15 8 6 passing parameters to a command file 8 6 Index similar to START 3 15 8 7 8 131 double at sign command 3 18 8 8 command file 8 8 similar to START 8 8 8 131 Backspace key 2 2 Cancel key 2 2 2 15 Interrupt key 2 3 Pause key 2 2 2 17 Resume key 2 2 Return key 2 2 _EDITOR in EDIT command 3 7 8 66 Infinity sign 8 36 Negative infinity sign 8 36 0 number format 4 5 9 number format 4 5 A ABORT mode 8 127 ACCEPT command 3 27 8 11 and DEFINE command 8 54 CHAR clause 8 11 customizing prompts for value 3 28 DATE clause 8 11 DEFAULT clause 8 12 FORMAT clause 8
226. ibutes 4 9 8 32 listing all columns display attributes 8 32 listing all columnsdisplayattributes 4 9 NEW_VALUE clause 4 30 4 32 8 37 NEWLINE clause 8 37 NOPRINT clause 4 30 8 38 NULL clause 8 38 OFF clause 4 10 8 38 OLD_VALUE clause 4 31 8 38 ON clause 4 10 8 38 PRINT clause 8 38 resetting a column to default display 4 9 8 33 restoring column display attributes 4 10 8 38 Index 4 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 8 40 suppressing column display attributes 4 10 8 38 TRUNCATED clause 4 8 8 38 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 146 WORD_WRAPPED clause 4 8 4 10 8 38 WRAPPED clause 4 8 8 38 Column headings aligning 8 37 changing 4 2 8 36 changing character used to underline 4 3 8 113 changing to two or more words 4 3 8 36 displaying on more than one line 4 3 8 36 suppressing printing inareport 8 107 when truncated 8 34 when truncated for CHAR and LONG columns 4 7 when truncated for DATE columns 4 7 when truncated for NUMBER columns 4 4 Column separator 8 104 Columns assigning aliases 8 33 computing summary lines 4 16 8 43 copying display attributes 4 8 8 20 8 37 copying values between tables 6 4 6 9 8 51 displaying values in bottom titles 4 31 8 38 displaying values in top titles 4 30 8 37 formatting CHAR VARCHAR LONG and DATE 8 34 formatting in reports 4 2 8 32 formatting MLSLABEL RAW MLSLABEL ROWLABEL 8 34 f
227. if the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_START is set to TRUE NEXT Manually archives the next online redo log file group that has been filled but not yet archived ALL Manually archives all filled but not yet archived online log file groups integer Causes archival of the online redo log file group with log sequence number n You can specify any redo log file group that is still online An error occurs if the log file cannot be found online or the sequence number is not valid This option can be used to rearchive a log file group destination Specifies the destination device or directory in an operating system Specification of archive destination devices is installation specific see your platform specific Oracle documentation for examples of specifying archive destinations On many operating systems multiple log files can be spooled to the same tape If not specified in the command line the archive destination is derived from the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST The command 8 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG START destination causes the specified device or directory to become the new default archive destination for all future automatic or manual archives A destination specified with any other option is a temporary destination that is in effect only for the current manual archive It does not change the default archive destination for subsequent automatic archives For i
228. ight information and prompts you for your username the text displayed on your system may differ slightly SQL Plus Release 8 1 on Mon Nov 23 09 39 26 1998 c Copyright 1998 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Enter user name 4 Enter your username and press Return SQL Plus displays the prompt Enter password 5 Enter your password and press Return again For your protection your password does not appear on the screen The process of entering your username and password is called logging in SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle to which you connected and the versions of available tools such as PL SQL Next SQL Plus displays the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt The command prompt indicates that SOL Plus is ready to accept your commands If SQL Plus does not start you should see a message to help you correct the problem Shortcuts to Starting SQL Plus When you start SQL Plus you can enter your username and password separated by a slash following the command SQLPLUS For example if your username is SCOTT and your password is TIGER you can enter SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER and press Return You can also arrange to log in to SQL Plus automatically when you log on to your host operating system See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details Leaving SQL Plus When you are done working with SQL Plus and wish to return to the operating system
229. in SQL Plus is derived from the NLS parameters in effect Otherwise the default width is A9 In Oracle8 the NLS parameters may be set in your database parameter file or may be environment variables or an equivalent platform specific mechanism They may also be specified for each session with the ALTER SESSION command See the documentation for Oracle8i for a complete description of the NLS parameters You can change the format of any DATE column using the SQL function TO_CHAR in your SQL SELECT statement You may also wish to use an explicit COLUMN FORMAT command to adjust the column width When you use SQL functions like TO_CHAR Oracle automatically allows for a very wide column To change the width of a DATE column to n use the COLUMN command with FORMAT An If you specify a width shorter than the column heading the heading is truncated NUMBER Columns To change a NUMBER column s width use FORMAT followed by an element as specified in Table 8 1 8 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Table 8 1 Number Formats Element Example s Description 9 9999 Number of 9 s specifies number of significant digits returned Blanks are displayed for leading zeroes A zero 0 is displayed for a value of zero 0 0999 Displays a leading zero or a value of zero in this position 9990 as 0 9999 Prefixes value with dollar sign B B9999 Displays a zero value as blank regardless of 0 s in the format model
230. in which data is positioned in a field It may be positioned to the left right center flush left flush right or flush center of the defined width of a field anonymous block A PL SQL program unit that has no name and does not require the explicit presence of the BEGIN and END keywords to enclose the executable statements archived redo log Recovery structure where online redo log files are archived before being reused ARCHIVELOG Redo log mode where the filled online redo log files are archived before they are reused in the cycle In ARCHIVELOG mode the database can be completely recovered from both instance and disk failure The database can also be backed up Glossary 2 while it is open and available for use However additional administrative operations are required to maintain the archived redo log See also archived redo log argument A data item following the command file name in a START command The argument supplies a value for a parameter in the command file array processing Processing performed on multiple rows of data rather than one row at a time In some Oracle utilities such as SQL Plus Export Import and the precompilers users can set the size of the array increasing the array size often improves performance ASCII A convention for using digital data to represent printable characters ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange autocommit A feature unique to SQL Plus
231. ins the format you gave it in Example 2 4 If you have left SQL Plus and started again since performing Example 2 4 the column has reverted to its original format For information about the significance of case in a CHANGE command and on using wildcards to specify blocks of text ina CHANGE command refer to the CHANGE command in Chapter 8 Adding a New Line To insert a new line after the current line use the INPUT command To insert a line before line 1 enter a zero 0 and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer and that line becomes line 1 SQL gt 0 SELECT EMPNO Manipulating Commands 3 5 Editing Commands Example 3 4 Adding a Line Suppose you want to add a fourth line to the SQL command you modified in Example 3 3 Since line 3 is already the current line enter INPUT which may be abbreviated to I and press Return SQL Plus prompts you for the new line SQL gt INPUT 4 Enter the new line Then press Return SQL Plus prompts you again for a new line 4 ORDER BY SAL Press Return again to indicate that you will not enter any more lines and then use RUN to verify and re run the query Appending Text to a Line To add text to the end of a line in the buffer use the APPEND command 1 Use the LIST command or just the line number to list the line you want to change 2 Enter APPEND followed by the text you want to add If the text
232. into subsets with the BREAK command you can perform various computations on the rows in each subset You do this with the functions of the SOQL Plus COMPUTE command Use the BREAK and COMPUTE commands together in the following forms BREAK ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column You can include multiple break columns and actions such as skipping lines in the BREAK command as long as the column you name after ON in the COMPUTE command also appears after ON in the BREAK command To include multiple break columns and actions in BREAK when using it in conjunction with COMPUTE use these commands in the following forms BREAK ON break_column_1 SKIP PAGE ON break_column_2 SKIP 1 COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column_2 The COMPUTE command has no effect without a corresponding BREAK command You can COMPUTE on NUMBER columns and in certain cases on all types of columns For more information about the COMPUTE command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 4 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines The following table lists compute functions and their effects Table 4 1 Compute Functions Function Effect SUM Computes the sum of the values in the column MINIMUM Computes the minimum value in the column MAXIMUM Computes the maximum valu
233. isting file named PROFIT that has the extension SQL enter the following command SQL gt EDIT PROFIT Remember that EDIT assumes the file extension SQL if you do not specify one To edit an existing file using GET the SQL Plus editing commands and SAVE first retrieve the file with GET then edit the file with the SOL Plus editing commands and finally save the file with the SAVE command Note that if you want to replace the contents of an existing command file with the command or block in the buffer you must use the SAVE command and follow the filename with the word REPLACE For example SQL gt GET MYREPORT 1 SELECT FROM EMP SQL gt C ENAME JOB 1 SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP SQL gt SAVE MYREPORT REPLACE Wrote file MYREPORT If you want to append the contents of the buffer to the end of an existing command file use the SAVE command and follow the filename with the word APPEND SQL gt SAVE file_name APPEND 3 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use Exiting from a Command File with a Return Code If your command file generates a SQL error while running from a batch file on the host operating system you may want to abort the command file and exit with a return code Use the SQL Plus command WHENEVER SQLERROR to do this see the WHENEVER SQLERROR command in Chapter 8 for more information Similar
234. lause 8 94 CENTER clause 4 24 8 94 COL clause 4 24 8 94 FORMAT clause 8 94 indenting headings 8 94 LEFT clause 4 24 8 94 most often used clauses 4 23 OFF clause 8 94 PAGE clause 8 93 RIGHT clause 4 24 8 94 SKIP clause 4 24 8 94 suppressing current definition 8 94 TAB clause 8 94 REPLACE clause in COPY command 6 6 8 52 in SAVE command 3 16 8 98 Report breaks BREAK command 8 21 Report columns Columns 8 33 Report titles Titles 8 139 Reports 1 2 clarifying with spacing and summary lines 4 11 creating bottom titles 4 23 8 26 creating footers 8 91 creating headers 8 93 creating headers and footers 4 23 creating master detail 4 30 8 37 8 38 creating top titles 4 23 8 139 displaying 8 103 formatting column headings 4 2 8 32 formatting columns 4 4 4 6 8 32 starting on anew page 8 106 RESTRICT clause 8 132 RETRY clause 8 133 Return code specifying 3 17 8 70 8 153 REVOKE command E 2 disabling E 6 RIGHT clause 4 24 4 26 8 94 8 140 Roles E 8 disabling E 7 re enabling E 7 ROLLBACK clause 8 69 WHENEVER OSERROR 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 152 Index 13 Rows performing computations on 4 16 8 43 setting number retrieved at one time 8 102 setting the number after which COPY commits 8 105 RUN command 2 10 8 97 disabling E 5 executing current PL SQL block 2 11 executing current SQL command or PL SQL block 2 10 making last line current 3 4 similar to slash comman
235. lay attributes 8 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause column expr Identifies the data item typically the name of a column in a SQL SELECT command to which the column command refers If you use an expression in a COLUMN command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b ina COLUMN command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command If you select columns with the same name from different tables a COLUMN command for that column name will apply to both columns That is a COLUMN command for the column ENAME applies to all columns named ENAME that you reference in this session COLUMN ignores table name prefixes in SELECT commands Also spaces are ignored unless the name is placed in double quotes To format the columns differently assign a unique alias to each column within the SELECT command itself do not use the ALIAS clause of the COLUMN command and enter a COLUMN command for each column s alias ALI AS alias CLE AR Assigns a specified alias to a column which can be used to refer to the column in BREAK COMPUTE and other COLUMN commands Resets the display attributes for the column to default values To reset the attributes for all columns use the CLEAR COLUMNS command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBU
236. le F 5 SPOOL clause 8 125 SPOOL command 4 35 8 129 disabling E 5 filename 4 35 8 129 OFF clause 4 35 8 129 OUT clause 4 36 8 129 turning spooling off 4 35 8 129 SQL buffer 2 10 SQL clause 8 31 SQL commands list of major D 1 SQL database language 1 2 SQL DML statements reporting on 8 103 SQL Plus basic concepts 1 2 command prompt 2 4 command summary 8 2 database administration 5 2 exiting 2 4 8 69 exiting conditionally 8 150 8 152 limits C 1 LOGIN SQL 3 17 overview 1 2 running commands in batch mode 3 17 8 70 setting up environment 3 17 shortcuts to starting 2 4 starting 2 3 7 2 what you need torun 1 7 who can use 1 3 SQLBLANKLINES variable 8 111 SQLCASE variable 8 112 SQLCODE clause 8 125 SQLCONTINUE variable 8 112 SQLNUMBER variable 8 112 SQLPLUS command 2 3 7 2 hyphen clause 7 3 Index 16 clause 7 3 and at sign 3 15 6 3 7 2 and EXIT FAILURE 7 4 connecting to a remote database 6 3 display syntax 7 3 NOLOG clause 7 3 running command files 3 15 service name 6 3 6 4 7 3 SILENT clause 7 2 unsuccessful connection 7 4 username password 2 4 7 2 SQL PNO referencing in report titles 4 28 SQLPREFIX variable 8 112 SQLPROMPT variable 8 112 SQL SQLCODE using in EXIT command 8 69 SQLTERMINATOR variable 8 74 8 112 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 8 87 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 8 87 START clause 8 16 8 137 START command 3 14 8 130 arguments 3 25 8
237. le 3 9 Running a Command File To retrieve and run the command stored in SALES SOL enter SQL gt START SALES SQL Plus runs the commands in the file SALES and displays the results of the commands on your screen formatting the query results according to the SQL Plus commands in the file EMPNO SALESMAN SALARY COMMISSION 7499 ALLE 1 600 300 7521 WARD 1 250 500 7654 MARTIN 1 250 1 400 7844 TURNER 1 500 0 To see the commands as SQL Plus enters them you can set the ECHO variable of the SET command to ON The ECHO variable controls the listing of the commands in command files run with the START and commands Setting the ECHO variable to OFF suppresses the listing You can also use the at sign command to run a command file SQL gt SALES 3 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use The command lists and runs the commands in the specified command file in the same manner as START SET ECHO affects the command as it affects the START command START and leave the last SOL command or PL SQL block in the command file in the buffer Running a Command File as You Start SQL Plus To run a command file as you start SOL Plus use one of the following four options a Follow the SQLPLUS command with your username a slash your password a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS SCOTI TIGER SALES SOL Plus starts and runs the command
238. le_name ext arg Represents the command file you wish to execute The file can contain any command that you can run interactively If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing this default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter When you enter START file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SOL Plus does not find such a file SOL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search Consult the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the command file If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the command file The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The START command DEFINEs the parameters with the values of the arguments if you START the command file again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the old values For more information on using parameters refer to the subsection Passing Parameters through the START Command under
239. led each line of server output is truncated to the line size specified by SET LINESIZE For each FORMAT every server output line begins on a new output line For more information on DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE see your Oracle8i Application Developer s Guide SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE Allows correct alignment for terminals that display shift characters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is useful for terminals which display shift characters together with data for example IBM 3270 terminals You can only use this command with shift sensitive character sets for example JA16DBCS Use VISIBLE for terminals that display shift characters as a visible character for example a space or a colon INVISIBLE is the opposite and does not display any shift characters SHOW MODE OFF ON Controls whether SQL Plus lists the old and new settings of a SQL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET ON lists the settings OFF suppresses the listing SHOWMODE ON has the same behavior as the obsolete SHOWMODE BOTH SQLBL ANKLINES ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus allows blank lines within a SQL command ON interprets blank lines and new lines as part of a SQL command OFF the default value does not allow blank lines or new lines in a SQL command SQL Plus returns to the default behavior when a SQLTERMINTATOR or BLOCKTERMINATOR is encountered Command Reference 8 111 SET SQLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER Convert
240. lias ON expr column alias REPORT ROW Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause function Represents one of the functions listed in Table 8 2 If you specify more than one function use spaces to separate the functions Table 8 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes AVG Average of non null values NUMBER COU NT Count of non null values all types MAX IMUM Maximum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING MIN IMUM Minimum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING NUM BER Count of rows all types Command Reference 8 43 COMPUTE Table 8 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes STD Standard deviation of non null NUMBER values SUM Sum of non null values NUMBER VAR IANCE Variance of non null values NUMBER LAB EL text Defines the label to be printed for the computed value If no LABEL clause is used text defaults to the unabbreviated function keyword If text contains spaces or punctuation you must enclose it with single quotes The label prints left justified and truncates to the column width or linesize whichever is smaller The maximum length of a label is 500 characters The label for the computed value appears in the break column specified To suppress the label use the NOPRINT option of the
241. list text Represents the CHAR value you wish to assign to variable Enclose text in single quotes if it contains punctuation or blanks variable text Defines names a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value Enter DEFINE followed by variable to list the value and type of variable Enter DEFINE with no clauses to list the values and types of all user variables Usage Notes DEFINEd variables retain their values until one of the following events occurs you enter anew DEFINE command referencing the variable a you enter an UNDEFINE command referencing the variable you enter an ACCEPT command referencing the variable you reference the variable in the NEW_VALUE or OLD_VALUE clause of the COLUMN command and reference the column in a subsequent SQL SELECT command a you EXIT SQL Plus Whenever you run a stored query or command file SOL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or 8 54 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable Note that you can use DEFINE to define the variable EDITOR which establishes the host system editor invoked by the SQL Plus EDIT command If you continue the value of a DEFINEd variable on multiple lines using the SQL Plus command continuation character SQL Plus replaces each continuation charac
242. lso use an ORDER BY clause in the SQL SELECT command Typically the columns used in the BREAK command should appear in the same order in the ORDER BY clause although all columns specified in the ORDER BY clause need not appear in the BREAK command This prevents breaks from occurring at meaningless points in the report The following SELECT command produces meaningful results SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO JOB SAL ENAME 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY DEPTNO JOB SAL ENAME All rows with the same DEPTNO print together on one page and within that page all rows with the same JOB print in groups Within each group of jobs those jobs with the same SAL print in groups 8 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK Breaks in ENAME cause no action because ENAME does not appear in the BREAK command ON expr action action When you include action s specifies action s for SQL Plus to take when the value of the expression changes When you omit action s BREAK ON expr suppresses printing of duplicate values of expr and marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can use an expression involving one or more table columns or an alias assigned to a report column in a SQL SELECT or SQL Plus COLUMN command If you use an expression in a BREAK command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in
243. lternative default database See local database directory On some operating systems a named storage space for a group of files It is actually one file that lists a set of files on a particular device dismounted database A database that is not mounted by any instance and thus cannot be opened and is not currently available for use display format See format display width The number of characters or spaces allowed to display the values for an output field DML See Data Manipulation Language DML Glossary 9 Glossary 10 DUAL table A standard Oracle database table named DUAL which contains exactly one row The DUAL table is useful for applications that require a small dummy table the data is irrelevant to guarantee a known result such as true editor A program that creates or modifies files end user The person for whom a system is being developed for example an airline reservations clerk is an end user of an airline reservations system See also SQL Plus error message A message from a computer program for example SQL Plus informing you of a potential problem preventing program or command execution expression A formula such as SALARY COMMISSION used to calculate a new value from existing values An expression can be made up of column names functions operators and constants Formulas are found in commands or SQL statements extension On some operating systems the second pa
244. lumn Specifies the names of the columns in destination_table You must enclose a name in double quotes if it contains lowercase letters or blanks Command Reference 8 51 COPY If you specify columns the number of columns must equal the number of columns selected by the query If you do not specify any columns the copied columns will have the same names in the destination table as they had in the source if COPY creates destination_table USING query Specifies a SQL query SELECT command determining which rows and columns COPY copies FROM username password net_service_name Specifies the username password and database that contains the data to be copied If you omit the FROM clause the source defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must include a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default TO username password net_service_name Specifies the database containing the destination table If you omit the TO clause the destination defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must include a TO clause to specify a destination database other than the default APPEND Inserts the rows from query into destination_table if the table exists If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it CREATE Inserts the rows from query into destination_table after first creati
245. lus error The EXIT clause of WHENEVER SQLERROR follows the same syntax as the EXIT command See EXIT in this chapter for details Turns off the EXIT option Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing Usage Notes The WHENEVER SQLERROR command is triggered by SQL command or PL SQL block errors and not by SQL Plus command errors 8 152 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER SQLERROR Examples The commands in the following command file cause SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code if the SQL UPDATE command fails SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOQL SQLCODE SQL gt UPDATE EMP SET SAL SAL 1 1 The following SQL command error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOL SQLCODE SQL gt SELECT COLUMN_DOES NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Disconnected from Oracle The following SQL command error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the value of the variable MY_ERROR_VAR SQL gt DEFINE MY_ERROR_VAR 99 SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT
246. lus produces a STATISTICS report a second connection to the database is automatically created This connection is closed when the STATISTICS option is set to OFF or you log out of SQL Plus The formatting of your AUTOTRACE report may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configuration of the server AUTOTRACE is not available when FIPS flagging is enabled See Tracing Statements in Chapter 3 for more information on AUTOTRACE BLO CKTERMINATOR c Sets the non alphanumeric character used to end PL SQL blocks to c To execute the block you must issue a RUN or slash command CMDS EP c OFF ON Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SQL Plus commands entered on one line to c ON or OFF controls whether you can enter multiple commands on a line ON automatically sets the command separator character to a semicolon COLSEP _ text Sets the text to be printed between SELECTed columns If the COLSEP variable contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single quotes The default value for text is a single space In multi line rows the column separator does not print between columns that begin on different lines The column separator does not 8 104 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET appear on blank lines produced by BREAK SKIP n and does not overwrite the record separator See SET RECSEP in this chapter for more infor
247. ly the WHENEVER OSERROR command may be used to exit if an operating system error occurs See the WHENEVER OSERROR command in Chapter 8 for more information Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment You may wish to set up your SQL Plus environment in a particular way such as showing the current time as part of the SQL Plus command prompt and then reuse those settings with each session You can do this through a host operating system file called LOGIN with the file extension SQL also called your User Profile The exact name of this file is system dependent see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for the precise name You can add any SQL commands PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands to this file when you start SQL Plus it automatically searches for your LOGIN file first in your local directory and then on a system dependent path and runs the commands it finds there You may also have a Site Profile for example GLOGIN SQL See the SQLPLUS command in Chapter 7 for more information on the relationship of Site and User Profiles Modifying Your LOGIN File You can modify your LOGIN file just as you would any other command file You may wish to add some of the following commands to the LOGIN file SET COMPATIBILITY Followed by V7or V8 sets compatibility to the version of Oracle you specify Setting COMPATIBILITY to V7 allows you to run command files created with Oracle7 SET NUMFOR
248. management new OPERATIONS BOSTON SQL gt PRINT id SQL gt COMMIT Note dept_management new refers to a PL SQL function new in a package dept_management The function new adds the department data to a table Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables allow SQL Plus to fetch and format the results of aSELECT statement contained in a PL SQL block REFCURSOR bind variables can also be used to reference PL SQL cursor variables in stored procedures This allows you to store SELECT statements in the database and reference them from SQL Plus A REFCURSOR bind variable can also be returned from a stored function Note You must have Oracle7 Release 7 3 or above to assign the return value of a stored function to a REFCURSOR variable Example 3 18 Creating Referencing and Displaying REFCURSOR Bind Variables To create reference and display a REFCURSOR bind variable first declare a local bind variable of the REFCURSOR datatype SQL gt VARIABLE dept_sel REFCURSOR Next enter a PL SQL block that uses the bind variable in an OPEN FOR SELECT statement This statement opens a cursor variable and executes a query See the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on the OPEN command and cursor variables 3 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables In this example we are binding the SQL Plus dept_sel bind variable to t
249. mation COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE CON CAT Specifies the version of Oracle to which you are currently connected Set COMPATIBILITY to V7 for Oracle7 or V8 for Oracle8 and Oracle8i Set COMPATIBILITY to NATIVE if you wish the database to determine the setting for example if connected to Oracle8 or Oracle8i compatibility would default to V8 COMPATIBILITY must be correctly set for the version of Oracle to which you are connected otherwise you will be unable to run any SQL commands Note that you can set COMPATIBILITY to V7 when connected to Oracle8i This enables you to run Oracle7 SQL against Oracle8i c OFF ON Sets the character you can use to terminate a substitution variable reference if you wish to immediately follow the variable with a character that SQL Plus would otherwise interpret as a part of the substitution variable name SQL Plus resets the value of CONCAT to a period when you switch CONCAT on COPYC OMMIT 0 n Controls the number of batches after which the COPY command commits changes to the database COPY commits rows to the destination database each time it copies n row batches Valid values are zero to 5000 You can set the size of a batch with the ARRAYSIZE variable If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY performs a commit only at the end of a copy operation COPYTYPECHECK OFF ON DEF INE Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with th
250. me UNTIL CONTROLFILE OGFILE filename CONTINUE DEFAULT CANCEL PARALLEL clause where options requires the following syntax CANCEL CHANGE integer TIME date and where clause requires the following syntax PARALLEL DEGREE integer DEFAULT INSTANCES integer DEFAULT NOPARALLEL Terms an d Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term and clause AUTOMATIC Automatically generates the name of the next archived redo log file needed to continue the recovery operation Oracle uses the LOG_ ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 and LOG_ARCHIVE_ FORMAT parameters or their defaults to generate the target redo log filename If the file is found the redo contained in that file is applied If the file is not found Oracle prompts you for a filename displaying the generated filename as a suggestion If you specify neither AUTOMATIC nor LOGFILE Oracle prompts you for a filename displaying the generated filename as a suggestion You can then accept the generated filename or replace it with a fully Command Reference 8 85 RECOVER qualified filename If you know the archived filename differs from what Oracle would generate you can save time by using the LOGFILE clause FROM location Specifies the location from which the archived redo log file group is read The value of location must be a fully specified
251. mes of archived redo log files needed during recovery No interaction is needed when AUTORECOVERY is set to ON provided the necessary files are in the expected locations with the expected names The filenames used when AUTORECOVERY is ON are derived from the values of the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT OFF the default option requires that you enter the filenames manually or accept the suggested default filename given AUTOT RACE OFF ON TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL DML statements SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE The report can include execution statistics and the query execution path OFF does not display a trace report ON displays a trace report TRACEONLY displays a trace report but does not print query data if Command Reference 8 103 SET any EXPLAIN shows the query execution path by performing an EXPLAIN PLAN STATISTICS displays SQL statement statistics Using ON or TRACEONLY with no explicit options defaults to EXPLAIN STATISTICS The TRACEONLY option may be useful to suppress the query data of large queries If STATISTICS is specified SQL Plus still fetches the query data from the server however the data is not displayed The AUTOTRACE report is printed after the statement has successfully completed Information about Execution Plans and the statistics is documented in the Oracle8i Tuning manual When SQL P
252. mns If the WRAP variable of the SET command is set to ON its default value the employee names wrap to the next line after the fourth character as shown in Example 4 5 If WRAP is set to OFF the names are truncated cut off after the fourth character The system variable WRAP controls all columns you can override the setting of WRAP for a given column through the WRAPPED WORD_WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 for more information on these clauses You will use the WORD_ WRAPPED clause of COLUMN later in this chapter Note The column heading is truncated regardless of the setting of WRAP or any COLUMN command clauses Now return the column to its previous format SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A10 Copying Column Display Attributes When you want to give more than one column the same display attributes you can reduce the length of the commands you must enter by using the LIKE clause of the COLUMN command The LIKE clause tells SOL Plus to copy the display attributes of a previously defined column to the new column except for changes made by other clauses in the same command Example 4 6 Copying a Column s Display Attributes To give the column COMM the same display attributes you gave to SAL but to specify a different heading enter the following command SQL gt COLUMN COMM LIKE SAL HEADING Bonus Rerun the query SQL gt 4
253. model does not contain the MI S or PR format elements negative return values automatically contain a leading negative sign and positive values automatically contain a leading space A number format model can contain only a single decimal character D or period but it can contain multiple group separators G or commas A group separator or comma cannot appear to the right of a decimal character or period in a number format model SQL Plus formats NUMBER data right justified A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus may round your NUMBER data to fit your format or field width If a value cannot fit within the column width SQL Plus indicates overflow by displaying a pound sign in place of each digit the width allows If a positive value is extremely large and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the infinity sign replaces the value Likewise if a negative value is extremely small and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the negative infinity sign replaces the value HEA DING text Defines a column heading If you do not use a HEADING clause the column s heading defaults to column or expr If text contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it wi
254. n and so is equivalent to LEFT or an indent of zero COL 15 places the title element in the 15th character position indenting it 14 spaces Example 4 20 Indenting a Title Element To print the company name left aligned with the report name indented five spaces on the next line enter SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET SKIP 1 gt COL 6 SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query to see the results SQL gt ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Formatting Query Results 4 27 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Entering Long Titles If you need to enter a title greater than 500 characters in length you can use the SQL Plus command DEFINE to place the text of each line of the title in a separate user variable SQL gt DEFINE LINE1 This is the first line SQL gt DEFINE LINE2 This is the second line SQL gt DEFINE LINE3 This is the third line Then reference the variables in your TTITLE or BIITLE command as follows SQL gt TTITLE CENTER LINE1 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE2 SKIP 1 gt CENTER LINE3
255. n any printable characters such as A 3 amp or blanks and can have from 1 to 2000 characters or can be null character A single location on a computer system capable of holding one alphabetic character or numeric digit One or more characters are held in a field One or more fields make up a record and one or more records may be held in a file or database table character string A group of sequential letters numerals or symbols usually comprising a word or name or portion thereof clause A part of a SQL statement that does not constitute the full statement for example a WHERE clause client A user software application or computer that requests the services data or processing of another application or computer the server In a two task environment the client is the user process In a network environment the client is the local user process and the server may be local or remote CLOB datatype A standard Oracle datatype The CLOB datatype is used to store single byte character large object data and can store up to 4 gigabytes of character data column A vertical space in a database table that represents a particular domain of data A column has a column name and a specific datatype For example ina table of employee information all of the employees dates of hire would constitute one column A record group column represents a database column column expression An expression in a SELECT statement t
256. n command files 3 11 8 90 using to create 3 12 Index 5 using tocreate 3 12 using REMARK to create 3 11 8 90 COMMIT clause 8 69 WHENEVER OSERROR 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 152 COMMIT command 2 14 COMPATIBILITY clause in LOGIN SQL 3 17 COMPATIBILITY variable 8 105 COMPUTE command 4 11 8 43 AVG function 4 17 computing a summary on different columns 4 21 COUNT function 4 17 LABEL clause 4 17 4 20 8 44 listing all definitions 4 22 8 45 MAXIMUM function 4 17 maximum LABEL length 8 44 MINIMUM function 4 17 NUMBER function 4 17 OF clause 4 16 ON column clause 4 16 8 44 ON expr clause 8 44 ON REPORT clause 4 20 8 44 ON ROW clause 8 44 printing grand and sub summaries 4 21 printing multiple summaries on same column 4 21 printing summary lines at ends of reports 4 20 printing summary lines ona break 4 16 referencing a SELECT expression in OF 8 44 referencing a SELECT expression in ON 8 45 removing definitions 4 23 8 30 STD function 4 17 SUM function 4 17 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 146 VARIANCE function 4 17 COMPUTES clause 4 22 8 30 CONCAT variable 3 25 8 105 Concurrency instances multiple 8 133 CONNECT command changing password 8 79 SYSDBA clause 8 50 Index 6 CONNECT command SQL disabling E 6 CONNECT command SQL Plus 6 2 6 3 8 49 and at sign 6 3 8 49 changing password 8 49 8 50 service name 6 3 username password 6 2 6 3 6 4
257. n the COLUMN command and in the old forms of BTITLE and TTITLE to divide a column heading or title onto more than one line ON or OFF turns heading separation on or off When heading separation is OFF SQL Plus prints a heading separator character like any other character ON changes the value of c back to the default INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL Changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance path Using the SET INSTANCE command does not connect to a database The default instance is used for commands when no instance is specified Any commands preceding the first use of SET INSTANCE communicate with the default instance To reset the instance to the default value for your operating system you can either enter SET INSTANCE with no instance_path or SET INSTANCE LOCAL See your operating system specific Oracle documentation for a description of how to set the initial default instance Note you can only change the instance when you are not currently connected to any instance That is you must first make sure that you have disconnected from the current instance then set or change the instance and reconnect to an instance in order for the new setting to be enabled This command may only be issued when Net8 is running You can use any valid Net8 connect string as the specified instance path See your operating system specific Oracle documentation for a complete description of how your operating system specifi
258. n variables by passing values to parameters in a command file through the START command You do this by placing an ampersand amp followed by a numeral in the command file in place of a substitution variable Each time you run this command file START replaces each amp 1 in the file with the first value called an argument after START filename then replaces each amp 2 with the second value and so forth Manipulating Commands 3 25 Writing Interactive Commands For example you could include the following commands in a command file called MYFILE SELECT FROM EMP WHERE JOB amp 1 AND SAL amp 2 In the following START command SQL Plus would substitute CLERK for amp 1 and 7900 for amp 2 in the command file MYFILE SQL gt START MYFILE CLERK 7900 When you use arguments with the START command SQL Plus DEFINEs each parameter in the command file with the value of the appropriate argument Example 3 14 Passing Parameters through START To create anew command file based on SALES that takes a parameter specifying the job to be displayed enter SQL gt GET SALES 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM 5 FROM EMP
259. nd WHENEVER OSERROR commands later in this chapter Example The following example commits all uncommitted transactions and returns the error code of the last executed SQL command or PL SQL block SQL gt EXIT SQL SOQLCODE The location of the return code depends on your system Consult your DBA for information concerning how your operating system retrieves data from a program See the TTITLE command in this chapter for more information on SQL SQLCODE 8 70 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference GET GET Purpose Loads a host operating system file into the SOL buffer Syntax GET file_name ext LIS T NOL IST Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the file you wish to load typically a command file LIS T Lists the contents of the file NOL IST Suppresses the listing Usage Note If you do not specify a file extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If part of the filename you are specifying contains the word list or the word file you need to put the name in double quotes SQL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory The operating system file should contain a single SOL statement or PL SQL block The statement should not be terminated with a semicolon
260. nd see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 5 1 Starting an Instance To start an Oracle instance without mounting the database enter SQL gt STARTUP NOMOUNT 5 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown Example 5 2 Mounting the Database To start an instance mount the database but leave the database closed enter SQL gt STARTUP MOUNT Example 5 3 Opening the Database To start an instance using the parameter file INITSALE ORA mount and open the database named SALES in exclusive mode and restrict access to administrative personnel enter SQL gt STARTUP OPEN sales PFILE INITSALE ORA EXCLUSIVE RESTRICT Database Shutdown Shutting down a database involves three steps 1 Closing the database When a database is closed all database and recovery data in the SGA are written to the datafiles and redo log files and closes all online datafiles 2 Dismounting the database Dismounting the database disassociates the database from an instance and closes the control files of the database 3 Shutting down the instance Shutting down an instance reclaims the SGA from memory and terminates the background Oracle processes that constitute an Oracle instance For more information about database SHUTDOWN see the Oracle8i Concepts manual For information about the SHUTDOWN command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 5 4 Shutting Down t
261. nd a PLAN_TABLE table created in your schema For more information on the PLUSTRACE role and PLAN_TABLE table see the AUTOTRACE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 Execution Plan The Execution Plan shows the SQL optimizer s query execution path Both tables are accessed by a full table scan sorted and then merged Each line of the Execution Plan has a sequential line number SQL Plus also displays the line number of the parent operation The Execution Plan consists of four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the relationship between each step and its parent This column is useful for large reports PLAN_PLUS_EXP Shows each step of the report OBJECT_NODE_PLUS_EXP Shows the database links or parallel query servers used The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command For example to stop the PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP column being displayed enter SQL gt COLUMN PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP NOPRINT The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sq 3 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Statistics The Execution Plan output is generated using the EXPLAIN PLAN command For information about interpreting the output of EXPLAIN PLAN see the Oracle8i Tuning guide The statistics are recorded by the server when your statement execu
262. nformation about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle documentation Usage Notes You must be connected to an open Oracle database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA For information about connecting to the database see the CONNECT command If an online redo log file group fills and none are available for reuse database operation is suspended The condition can be resolved by archiving a log file group For information about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle documentation Note This command applies only to the current instance To specify archiving for a different instance or for all instances in a Parallel Server use the SQL command ALTER SYSTEM For more information about using SQL commands see the Oracle8i SQL Reference Examples To start up the archiver process and begin automatic archiving using the archive destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG START To stop automatic archiving enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG STOP Command Reference 8 17 ARCHIVE LOG To archive the log file group with the sequence number 1001 to the destination specified enter SQL gt ARCHIVI E LOG 1001 vobs oracle dbs arch arch specifies the prefix of the filename on the destination device the remainder of the filename is dependent on the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_ FORMAT which specifies the filename format for archived
263. ng order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step OTHER_TAG_ PLUS_ Describes the function of the SQL statement in the EXP OTHER_PLUS_EXP column OTHER_PLUS_EXP Shows the text of the query for the parallel server or remote database The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sq Note You must have Oracle7 Release 7 3 or greater to view the second section of this report 3 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Example 3 24 Tracing Statements With Parallel Query Option To trace a parallel query running the parallel query option SQL gt CREATE TABLE D2_T1 UNIQUE NUMBER PARALLEL gt DEGREE 6 Table created SQL gt CREATE TABLE D2_T2 UNIQUE1 NUMBER PARALLEL gt DEGREE 6 Table created SQL gt CREATE UNIQUE INDEX D2_I UNIQUE ON D2_T1 UNIQUI Index created SQL gt SET LONG 500 LONGCHUNKSIZE 500 SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN SQL gt select index b d2_i_uniquel use_nl b ordered gt count a uniquel 2 from d2_t2 a d2tl b 3 where a uniquel b uniquel SQL Plus displays the following output
264. ng the table If destination_table already exists COPY returns an error INSERT Inserts the rows from query into destination_table If destination_table does not exist COPY returns an error When using INSERT the USING query must select one column for each column in the destination_table REPLACE Replaces destination_table and its contents with the rows from query If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it Otherwise COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data 8 52 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY Usage Notes To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The SQL Plus SET variable LONG limits the length of LONG columns that you copy If any LONG columns contain data longer than the value of LONG COPY truncates the data SQL Plus performs a commit at the end of each successful COPY If you set the SQL Plus SET variable COPYCOMMIT to a positive value n SQL Plus performs a commit after copying every n batches of records The SQL Plus SET variable ARRAYSIZE determines the size of a batch
265. ng the RECOVER option the database remains mounted and closed database The name of the database to mount or open If no database name is specified the database name is taken from the initialization parameter DB_NAME EXCLUSIVE Signifies that the database can only be mounted and opened by the current instance it cannot be opened simultaneously by multiple instances Cannot be used with SHARED PARALLEL or NOMOUNT If no mounting option is specified EXCLUSIVE is assigned by default PARALLEL Must be specified if the database is to be mounted by multiple instances concurrently Cannot be used with EXCLUSIVE or NOMOUNT Invalid if the initialization parameter SINGLE_PROCESS is set to TRUE SHARED Synonym for PARALLEL RETRY Specifies that opening the database should be attempted every five seconds if the instance is busy being recovered by another instance When an instance is being recovered by another instance the down instance cannot open the database until recovery is complete If the Command Reference 8 133 STARTUP database cannot be opened for any other reason RETRY does not attempt to open the database again This option is only available for instances operating in PARALLEL mode Usage Notes You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot be connected via a multi threaded server Examples To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database in exclusive m
266. ng_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store LONG values in this column Administration The DBA username SYSTEM owns and has all privileges on PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE When SYSTEM logs in SQL Plus does not read PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE Therefore no restrictions apply to user SYSTEM Other Oracle usernames should have only SELECT access to this table which allows a view of restrictions of that username and those restrictions assigned to PUBLIC The command file PUPBLD when run grants SELECT access on PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE to PUBLIC Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands To disable a SQL or SQL Plus command for a given user insert a row containing the user s username in the Userid column the command name in the Attribute column and DISABLED in the Char_Value column E 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR DATE VALUE VALUE VALUE SQL Plus SCOTT HOST DISABLED SQL Plus INSERT DISABLED SQL Plus UPDATE DISABLED SQL Plus DELETE DISABLED To reenable commands delete the row containing the restriction You can disable the following SQL Plus commands a COPY a EDIT a EXECUTE a EXIT a GET HOST or yo
267. nter a COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OFF The OFF clause tells SQL Plus to use the default display attributes for the column but does not remove the attributes you have defined through the COLUMN command To restore the attributes you defined through COLUMN use the ON clause COLUMN column_name ON Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values As you have seen by default SOL Plus wraps column values to additional lines when the value does not fit within the column width If you want to insert a record separator a line of characters or a blank line after each wrapped line of output or after every row use the RECSEP and RECSEPCHAR variables of the SET command RECSEP determines when the line of characters is printed you set RECSEP to EACH to print after every line to WRAPPED to print after wrapped lines and to OFF to suppress printing The default setting of RECSEP is WRAPPED RECSEPCHAR sets the character printed in each line You can set RECSEPCHAR to any character You may wish to wrap whole words to additional lines when a column value wraps to additional lines To do so use the WORD_WRAPPED clause of the COLUMN command as shown below COLUMN column_name WORD_WRAPPED Example 4 8 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values To print a line of dashes after each wrapped column value enter the following commands SQL gt SET RECSEP WRAPPED SQL gt SET RECSEPCH
268. ntrolling Treatment of the Destination Table later in this chapter By default the copied columns have the same names in the destination table that they have in the source table If you want to give new names to the columns in the destination table enter the new names in parentheses after the destination table name If you enter any column names you must enter a name for every column you are copying Accessing SQL Databases 6 5 Copying Data from One Database to Another Note To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SOL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The USING clause specifies a query that names the source table and specifies the data that COPY copies to the destination table You can use any form of the SQL SELECT command to select the data that the COPY command copies Here is an example of a COPY command that copies only two columns from the source table and copies only those rows in which the value of DEPTNO is 30 SQL gt COPY FR SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt REPLACE EMPCOPY2 USING SELECT ENAME SAL FROM EMPCOPY WHERE DEPTNO 30
269. o Another You must use a username and password valid for the remote database and substitute the appropriate service name for the remote database SOL Plus prompts you for username and password as needed starts SQL Plus and connects you to the specified database This database becomes the default database until you CONNECT to another database DISCONNECT or leave SOL Plus If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SOL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA Once again you can manipulate tables in the remote database directly after you connect in this manner Note Do not confuse the symbol of the connect string with the command used to run a command file Copying Data from One Database to Another Use the SQL Plus COPY command to copy data between databases and between tables on the same database With the COPY command you can copy data between databases in the following ways copy data from a remote database to your local database copy data from your local default database to a remote database on most systems copy data from one remote database to another remote database on most systems Note In general the COPY command was designed to be used for copying data between Oracle and non Oracle databases You should
270. o the beginning of the file and SET TERMOUT ON to the end of the file Save the file you automatically return to SQL Plus Now run the command file EMPRPT SQL gt EMPRPT Formatting Query Results 4 37 Storing and Printing Query Results SQL Plus displays the output on your screen unless you set TERMOUT to OFF spools it to the file TEMP and sends the contents of TEMP to your default printer ACME WIDGET LOYEE REPORT PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE SALARY 10 CLARK 2 450 KING 5 000 MILLER 1 300 KKKKKKKKKK Se sum 8 750 20 SMITH 800 ADAMS 1 100 FORD 3 000 SCOTT 3 000 JONES 2 975 Te AST ERS l sum 10 875 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL AC E WIDGET LOYEE REPORT PAGE 2 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYE SALARY 30 ALIE 1 600 BLAKE 2 850 MARTIN 1 250 JAMES 900 TURNER 1 500 WARD 1 250 SERRER SENE ahi i i rae sum 9 400 KKKKKKK KKK ian catheter sum 29 025 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 4 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 5 Database Administration This chapter provides a brief overview of the database administration tools available in SQL Plus and discusses the following topics Overview Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown Redo Log Files Database Recovery This chapter
271. ode and open the database enter SQL gt STARTUP or enter SQL gt STARTUP OPEN database EXCLUSIVE To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database in parallel mode and open the database enter SQL gt STARTUP PARALLEL SQL gt STARTUP OPEN database PARALLEL To restart an instance that went down in parallel mode and may not yet have been recovered by other instances use the RETRY option SQL gt STARTUP PARALLEL RETRY To shutdown the current instance immediately restart it without mounting or opening and allow only database administrators to connect enter SQL gt STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT RESTRICT To start an instance using the parameter file TESTPARM without mounting the database enter SQL gt STARTUP PFILE testparm NOMOUNT 8 134 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP To shutdown a particular database immediately restart and open it in parallel mode allow access only to database administrators and use the parameter file MYINIT ORA enter SQL gt STARTUP OPEN database PFILE myinit ora FORCE SHARED RESTRICT To startup an instance and mount but not open a database enter SQL gt CONNECT INTERNAL Connected to an idle instance SQL gt STARTUP MOUNT ORACLE instance started Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409
272. olumn suppresses printing of duplicate values in column and marks a place in the report where Command Reference 8 21 BREAK SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can specify ON column one or more times If you specify multiple ON clauses as in SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP PAGE ON JOB gt SKIP 1 ON SAL SKIP 1 the first ON clause represents the outermost break in this case ON DEPTNO and the last ON clause represents the innermost break in this case ON SAL SQL Plus searches each row of output for the specified break s starting with the outermost break and proceeding in the order you enter the clauses to the innermost In the example SQL Plus searches for a change in the value of DEPTNO then JOB then SAL Next SOL Plus executes actions beginning with the action specified for the innermost break and proceeding in reverse order toward the outermost break in this case from SKIP 1 for ON SAL toward SKIP PAGE for ON DEPTNO SQL Plus executes each action up to and including the action specified for the first occurring break encountered in the initial search If for example in a given row the value of JOB changes but the values of DEPTNO and SAL remain the same SQL Plus skips two lines before printing the row one as a result of SKIP 1 in the ON SAL clause and one as a result of SKIP 1 in the ON JOB clause Whenever you use ON column you should a
273. on ame Null Type PLOYE RECUR_PERSON NAME VARCHAR2 20 ADDR ECUR_ADDRESS ADDR1 ECUR_ADDRESS1 DOB DATE GENDER VARCHAR2 10 DEPT ECUR_DEPARTMENT DEPTNO NUMBER DEPT_NAME VARCHAR2 20 LOCATIO VARCHAR2 20 START_DATE DATE POSITION VARCHAR2 1 SAL RECUR_SALARY ANNUAL_SAL NUMBER 10 2 EMP_TYPE VARCHAR2 1 COMM NUMBER 10 2 PENALTY RATE NUMBER 5 2 For more information on using the CREATE TYPE command see your Oracle8i SQL Reference For information about using the SET DESCRIBE and SHOW DESCRIBE commands see the SET and SHOW commands later in this chapter 8 64 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DISCONNECT DISCONNECT Purpose Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current username out of Oracle but does not exit SOL Plus Syntax DISC ONNECT Usage Notes Use DISCONNECT within a command file to prevent user access to the database when you want to log the user out of Oracle but have the user remain in SQL Plus Use EXIT or QUIT to log out of Oracle and return control to your host computer s operating system Example Your command file might begin with a CONNECT command and end with a DISCONNECT as shown below SQL gt GET MYFILE 1 CONNECT 15 DISCONNECT Command Reference 8 65 EDIT E
274. ons for client server and the web Oracle Application a tool which enables database access through web browsers Server and the Internet Oracle Designer a set of client server design tools for database applications Oracle Developer a set of client server and web development tools Oracle Discoverer a set of end user query tools Oracle a set of 3GL programming language interfaces Programmer Oracle Reports a publishing and reporting solution to disseminate dynamic information across corporate intranets or on the Internet Oracle Workflow a complete workflow management system that supports business process definition and automation Introduction 1 3 Using this Guide Oracle Express a powerful OnLine Analytical Processing OLAP server tools and pre built applications for financial and sales and marketing analysis Oracle Media a development tool for object oriented multimedia Objects applications Oracle Mobile a tool for applications using mobile and or detached clients Agents Using this Guide This Guide gives you information about SQL Plus that applies to all operating systems Some aspects of SQL Plus however differ on each operating system Such operating system specific details are covered in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your system Use these operating system specific manuals in conjunction with the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Throughout this Guide examples showing how to ent
275. ool and print the results create a command file named EMPRPT containing the following commands First use EDIT to create the command file with your host operating system text editor Do not use INPUT and SAVE or SQL Plus will add a slash to the end of the file and will run the command file twice once as a result of the semicolon and once due to the slash 4 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results SQL gt EDIT EMPRPT Next enter the following commands into the file using your text editor SPOOL TEMP CLEAR COLUMNS CLEAR BREAKS CLEAR COMPUTES COLUMN DEPTNO HEADING DEPARTMEN COLUMN ENAI HEADING EMPLOYEE COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP 1 ON REPOR COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTINO COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON REPORT SET PAGESIZE 21 SET NEWPAGE 0 SET LINESIZE 30 TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET SKIP 2 LEFT EMPLOYEE REPORT RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL FROM EMP ORDER BY DEPTNO SPOOL OUT If you do not want to see the output on your screen you can also add SET TERMOUT OFF t
276. ore than one PL SQL block 3 10 3 11 including more than one SQL command 3 10 3 11 listing names with HOST command 3 9 nesting 3 15 passing parameters to 3 25 8 6 8 130 registering 8 101 retrieving 3 13 8 71 running 3 14 8 6 8 130 running a series in sequence 3 15 running as you start SQL Plus 3 15 7 2 running in batch mode 3 17 8 70 running nested 8 8 saving contents of buffer in 3 8 8 98 Command prompt host operating system 2 3 SQL Plus 2 4 Commands 1 2 case 2 5 collecting timing statistics on 2 16 8 137 disabling E 4 host operating system running from SQL Plus 2 16 8 74 listing current in buffer 8 77 re enabling E 5 spaces 2 5 SQL continuing on additional lines 2 7 editing in buffer 3 2 editing with host system editor 3 7 8 66 ending 2 8 entering and executing 2 6 entering without executing 2 8 executing current 2 10 8 10 8 97 following syntax 2 7 list of major D 1 listing current in buffer 3 3 saving current 3 8 8 98 setting character used to end and run 8 112 SQL Plus abbreviations 2 11 command summary 8 2 continuing on additional lines 2 12 8 1 editing at command prompt 3 2 ending 2 13 8 1 entering and executing 2 11 entering during SQL command entry 8 112 stopping while running 2 15 storing in command files 3 8 syntax conventions 1 4 tabs 2 5 types of 2 5 variables that affect running 2 13 writing interactive 3 19 Comments including i
277. ormatting NUMBER 4 5 8 34 listing display attributes for all 4 9 8 32 listing display attributes for one 4 9 8 32 names in destination table when copying 6 5 8 51 printing line after values that overflow 4 10 8 110 resetting a column to default display 4 9 8 33 resetting all columns to default display 4 9 8 30 restoring display attributes 4 10 8 20 8 38 setting printing to off oron 4 30 8 38 starting new lines 8 37 storing values in variables 4 30 8 37 suppressing display attributes 4 10 8 20 8 38 truncating display for all when value overflows 4 8 8 114 truncating display for one when value overflows 4 8 8 38 wrapping display for all when value overflows 4 8 8 114 wrapping display for one when value overflows 4 8 8 38 wrapping whole words for one 4 10 COLUMNS clause 4 9 8 30 Comma number format 4 5 Command file extension 8 98 8 112 8 136 Command files 3 8 aborting and exiting with a return code 3 17 8 151 8 153 allowing end user input 3 19 creating with a system editor 3 11 creating with INPUT and SAVE 3 9 creating with SAVE 3 8 8 98 editing with GET and SAVE 3 16 editing with host system editor 3 16 8 66 in at sign command 3 14 8 6 in double at sign command 8 8 in EDIT command 3 16 8 66 in GET command 3 13 8 71 in SAVE command 3 8 3 10 8 98 in SQLPLUS command 3 15 7 2 in START command 3 14 8 130 including comments in 3 11 8 90 including m
278. ough the last line Deletes the last line Enter DEL with no clauses to delete the current line of the buffer Usage Notes DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line You can enter DEL several times to delete several consecutive lines Note DEL is a SQL Plus command and DELETE is a SQL command For more information about the SQL DELETE command see the Oracle8i SQL Reference 8 56 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEL Examples Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO To make the line containing the WHERE clause the current line you could enter SQL gt LIST 3 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN followed by SQL gt DEL The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO 2 FROM EME 3 ORDER BY DEPTNO pP E To delete the second line of the buffer enter SQL gt DEL 2 The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO 2 ORDER BY DEPTNO Command Reference 8 57 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE Purpose Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure Syntax DESC RIBE schema object net_servi
279. our Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a database_specification if you use a default logon Ina default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username Note that the prefix OPS can be set to any other string of text For example you may wish to change the settings in your INIT ORA parameters file to LOGONname or USERIDname See the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication NOLOG Establishes no initial connection to Oracle Before issuing any SQL commands you must issue a CONNECT command to establish a valid logon Use NOLOG when you want to have a SQL Plus command file prompt for the username password or database specification The first line of this command file is not assumed to contain a logon Displays the usage and syntax for the SQLPLUS command and then returns control to the operating system Displays the current version and level number for SQL Plus and then returns control to the operating system Do not enter a space between the hyphen and the question mark The SQL Plus command may be known by a different name under some operating systems for example plus81 See your SQL Plus installation documentation for further informa
280. pacing and Summary Lines a Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions a Storing and Printing Query Results Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Formatting Query Results 4 1 Formatting Columns Formatting Columns Through the SQL Plus COLUMN command you can change the column headings and reformat the column data in your query results Changing Column Headings When displaying column headings you can either use the default heading or you can change it using the COLUMN command The sections below describe how the default headings are derived and how you can alter them with the COLUMN command Default Headings SQL Plus uses column or expression names as default column headings when displaying query results Column names are often short and cryptic however and expressions can be hard to understand Changing Default Headings You can define a more useful column heading with the HEADING clause of the COLUMN command in the format shown below COLUMN column_name HEADING column_heading See the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 1 Changing a Column Heading To produce a report from EMP with new headings specified for DEPTNO ENAME and SAL enter the following commands SQL gt COLUMN DEPTNO HEADING Department SQL gt COLUMN ENAMF HEADING Employee SQL gt COLUMN
281. page and any number for the width You must set escape so that SQL Plus does not interpret the ampersand amp as a substitution variable See the ESCAPE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information on setting the escape character SQL Plus interprets TTITLE in the old form if a valid new form clause does not immediately follow the command name If you want to use CENTER with TTITLE and put more than one word on a line you should use the new form of TTITLE For more information see the TTITLE command in Chapter 8 SQL Plus Commands from Earlier Releases F 7 TTITLE old form Example To use the old form of TTITLE to set a top title with a left aligned date and right aligned page number on one line followed by SALES DEPARTMENT on the next line and PERSONNEL REPORT on a third line enter SQL gt TTITLE SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT F 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Glossary account An authorized user of an operating system or a product such as Oracle database server or Oracle Forms Depending on the operating system may be referred to as ID User ID login and so on Accounts are often created and controlled by a system administrator alias In SQL a temporary name assigned to a table view column or value within a SQL statement used to refer to that item later in the same statement or in associated SOL Plus commands alignment The way
282. pecified text on the current line of the buffer to the new specified text The current line is marked with an asterisk in the LIST output You can also use CHANGE to modify a line in the buffer that has generated an Oracle error SQL Plus sets the buffer s current line to the line containing the error so that you can make modifications To reenter an entire line you can type the line number followed by the new contents of the line If you specify a line number larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SQL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Examples Assume the current line of the buffer contains the following text 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK SECRETARY RECEPTIONIST Enter the following command SQL gt C RECEPTIONIST GUARD The text in the buffer changes as follows 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK SECRETARY GUARD Or enter the following command SQL gt C CLERK CLERK The original line changes to 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK Or enter the following command SQL gt C COOR BUTLER The original line changes to 4 WHER
283. ple find this most convenient but you may choose whatever line division makes your command most readable to you Ending a SQL Command You can end a SQL command in one of three ways witha semicolon a witha slash ona line by itself a witha blank line A semicolon tells SQL Plus that you want to run the command Type the semicolon at the end of the last line of the command as shown in Example 2 3 and press Return SOL Plus will process the command and store it in the SOL buffer see the section The SQL Buffer below for details If you mistakenly press Return before typing the semicolon SQL Plus will prompt you with a line number for the next line of your command Type the semicolon and press Return again to run the command Note You cannot enter a comment on the same line after a semicolon A slash ona line by itself also tells SQL Plus that you wish to run the command Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Type a slash and press Return again SQL Plus will execute the command and store it in the buffer see the section The SQL Buffer below for details A blank line tells SQL Plus that you have finished entering the command but do not want to run it yet Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Press Return again SOQL Plus now prompts you with the SQ
284. plication Developer s Guide Oracle amp i Distributed Database Systems Oracle8i Replication Oracle8i Utilities Oracle amp i Error Messages Oracle8i Migration Oracle8i Reference Oracle8i Tuning Oracle8i Parallel Server Concepts and Administration Net8 Administrator s Guide Oracle Call Interface Programmer s Guide Pro COBOL Precompiler Programmer s Guide Pro C C Precompiler Programmer s Guide Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Your Comments Are Welcome Oracle Corporation values and appreciates your comments as an Oracle user and reader of the manuals As we write revise and evaluate your opinions are the most important input we receive At the front of this manual is a form entitled Send Us Your Comments that we encourage you to use to tell us both what you like and what you dislike about this or other Oracle manuals If the form is not at the front of this manual or if you would like to contact us please use the following addresses and phone numbers For documentation questions comments contact SQL Plus Documentation Manager Australian Product Development Center Oracle Corporation Australia Pty Limited 324 St Kilda Road Melbourne VIC 3004 Australia 61 3 9209 1600 telephone 61 3 9690 0043 fax sqlplus us oracle com email For product questions comments contact SQL Plus Product Manager Australian Product Development Center Oracle Corporation A
285. ppendix B If you have multiple users on your computer your organization should have a Database Administrator called a DBA who supervises the use of Oracle The DBA is responsible for installing Oracle and SQL Plus on your system If you are acting as DBA see the instructions for installing Oracle and SQL Plus in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Information Specific to Your Operating System A few aspects of Oracle and SQL Plus differ from one type of host computer and operating system to another These topics are discussed in the Oracle installation and user s manual s published in a separate version for each host computer and operating system that SQL Plus supports Keep a copy of your Oracle installation and user s manual s available for reference as you work through this Guide When necessary this Guide will refer you to your installation and user s manual s Username and Password When you start SOL Plus you will need a username that identifies you as an authorized Oracle user and a password that proves you are the legitimate owner of your username See the PASSWORD command in Chapter 8 for details on how to change your password The demonstration username SCOTT and password TIGER may be set up on your system during the installation procedure In this Introduction 1 7 What You Need to Run SQL Plus case you can use the Oracle username SCOTT and password TIGE
286. priate point in your command file using the following format CLEAR SCREEN Before continuing to the next section reset all columns to their original formats and headings by entering the following command SQL gt CLEAR COLUMNS Using Bind Variables Suppose that you want to be able to display the variables you use in your PL SQL subprograms in SQL Plus or use the same variables in multiple subprograms If you declare a variable in a PL SQL subprogram you cannot display that variable in SOL Plus Use a bind variable in PL SQL to access the variable from SQL Plus Bind variables are variables you create in SQL Plus and then reference in PL SQL If you create a bind variable in SQL Plus you can use the variable as you would a declared variable in your PL SQL subprogram and then access the variable from SQL Plus You can use bind variables for such things as storing return codes or debugging your PL SQL subprograms Because bind variables are recognized by SQL Plus you can display their values in SQL Plus or reference them in other PL SQL subprograms that you run in SOL Plus 3 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Bind Variables Creating Bind Variables You create bind variables in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command For example VARIABLE ret_val NUMBER This command creates a bind variable named ret_val with a datatype of NUMBER For more information see the VARIABLE command in Cha
287. pter 8 To list all of the bind variables created in a session type VARIABLE without any arguments Referencing Bind Variables You reference bind variables in PL SQL by typing a colon followed immediately by the name of the variable For example ret_val 1 This command assigns a value to the bind variable named ret_val Displaying Bind Variables To display the value of a bind variable in SQL Plus you use the SQL Plus PRINT command For example PRINT ret_val This command displays a bind variable named ret_val For more information about displaying bind variables see the PRINT command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 3 17 Creating Referencing and Displaying Bind Variables To declare a local bind variable named id with a datatype of NUMBER enter SQL gt VARIABLE id NUMBER Next put a value of 1 into the bind variable you have just created SQL gt BEGIN 2 sid 1 3 END If you want to display a list of values for the bind variable named id enter SQL gt PRINT id Manipulating Commands 3 31 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Try creating some new departments using the variable SQL gt EXECUTE id dept_management new ACCOUNTING NEW YORK SQL gt EXECUTE id dept_management new RESEARCH DALLAS SQL gt EXECUTE id dept_management new SALES CHICAGO SQL gt EXECUTE id dept_
288. pting Return as Input cece tenes ce ceeeseeeenenenes 3 30 Clearing the Serenissima inei ia aap e e a a a E Aa 3 30 Using Bind Variables ssonssssniisrernue ea eae e a ia e bet t ti Gited 3 30 Creating Bind Variables ss isisi tisaini iliii diasaan daen idaaaruas disina ibia siasat 3 31 Referencing Bind YVariablesisassrer r oin AR A E E EE E R 3 31 Displaying Bind Variables e E E E EEA TEN 3 31 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables 0 ccccccccceccccsesesescscscseesescsesesesesescscssseseecseseseseseeseeesa 3 32 Tracing Statements nerion one arii nara a E E ESSEE a AaS EAE doses deh steve EESE 3 35 Controlling th Report ssenarisi aap enito lasi uaii 3 35 Execution Plan ssepe a a aa a a aa a a a i aaa a a aa aia 3 36 Statistics srne n a a a a e a a a a ee IRN eee Bee ee eed 3 37 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries s ss ssessssseesississesssestestestssesstesiestessnnsesiesreseessesees 3 40 4 Formatting Query Results vi Formatting Columns oare eE E aa E A Aa E AA eE E 4 2 Changing Column Headings 0 cccccceesececcscsssesesescscsesesesescscsssesescsesesssesescscsssnsesescseessnsneseeeses 4 2 Formattinig NUMBER Coltimins cei es eciees sevens iinne e e i a i 4 4 FOrmatting Datatypes sseni sennen eaea eine ioanen aeea aiaa a Ea tenes Seeplevagesesaesbeacst oas 4 6 Copying Column Display Attributes ccc aanihin 4 8 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes 0 0 ccccceesesecseteseeceeseseeecscsneneseneneee
289. r variables a substituting values in commands using the START command to provide values prompting for values Defining User Variables You can define variables called user variables for repeated use in a single command file by using the SQL Plus DEFINE command Note that you can also define user variables to use in titles and to save you keystrokes by defining a long string as the value for a variable with a short name Manipulating Commands 3 19 Writing Interactive Commands Example 3 11 Defining a User Variable To define a user variable EMPLOYEE and give it the value SMITH enter the following command SQL gt DEFINE EMPLOYEE SMITH To confirm the definition of the variable enter DEFINE followed by the variable name SQL gt DEFINE EMPLOYEE SOL Plus lists the definition DEFINE EMPLOYEE SMITH CHAR To list all user variable definitions enter DEFINE by itself at the command prompt Note that any user variable you define explicitly through DEFINE takes only CHAR values that is the value you assign to the variable is always treated as a CHAR datatype You can define a user variable of datatype NUMBER implicitly through the ACCEPT command You will learn more about the ACCEPT command later in this chapter To delete a user variable use the SQL Plus command UNDEFINE followed by the variable name Using Substitution Vari
290. rd PAGE and the page number reenter the TTITLE command as shown SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 gt SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following results ACME WIDGET PAGE 1 DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Formatting Query Results 4 29 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions To list a page title definition enter the appropriate title command with no clauses TTITLE BTITLE To suppress a title definition enter TTITLE OFF BIITLE OFF These commands cause SQL Plus to cease displaying titles on reports but do not clear the current definitions of the titles You may restore the current definitions by entering TTITLE ON BIITLE ON Displaying Column Values in Titles You may wish to create a master detail report that displays a changing master column value at the top of each page with the detail query results for that value below You can reference a column value in a top title by storing the desired value in a variable and referencing the variable in a TTITLE command Use the following form of the COLUMN command to define the variable
291. recognize TRUNCATE SHOW LABEL Purpose Shows the security level for the current session Syntax SHO W LABEL F 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE old form TTITLE old form Purpose Displays a title at the top of each report page Syntax TTI TLE text Usage Notes The old form of TTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SOL Plus The old form defines the top title as a line with the date left aligned and the page number right aligned followed by a line with centered text and then a blank line The text you enter defines the title TTITLE will display SQL Plus centers text based on the size of a line as determined by SET LINESIZE A separator character begins a new line two line separator characters in a row insert a blank line You can change the line separator character with SET HEADSEP You can control the formatting of page numbers in the old forms of TTITLE and BTITLE by defining a variable named _page The default value of _page is the formatting string page amp P4 To alter the format you can DEFINE _page with a new formatting string as follows SQL gt SET ESCAPE SQL gt DEFINE _page Page amp P2 This formatting string will print the word page with an initial capital letter and format the page number to a width of two You can substitute any text for
292. redo log files 8 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE Purpose Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column such as format for NUMBER data Also lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes Syntax ATTRIBUTE type_name attribute_name option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI CLE FOR MAT format LIKE type_name attribute_name alias ON OFF Terms and Clauses Enter ATTRIBUTE followed by type_name attribute_name and no other clauses to list the current display characteristics for only the specified attribute Enter ATTRIBUTE with no clauses to list all current attribute display characteristics Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause type_name attribute_name Identifies the data item typically the name of an attribute within the set of attributes for a given object of Object Type type_name If you select objects of the same Object Type an ATTRIBUTE command for that type_name attribute_name will apply to all such objects you reference in that session ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a type_name attribute_name which can be used to refer to the type_name attribute_name in other ATTRIBUTE commands Command Reference 8 19 ATTRIBUTE CLE AR Resets the display characteristics for the attribute_name The format specification m
293. rent 3 4 editing current 3 4 listing allin buffer 3 2 8 77 removing blanks atend 8 113 LINESIZE variable 4 26 4 33 8 108 LIST clause 8 15 8 71 LIST command 3 2 8 77 determining current line 3 4 8 77 making last line current 3 4 8 77 using an asterisk 3 2 8 77 LNO clause 8 124 LOBOFFSET variable 8 109 LOCK TABLE command disabling E 6 LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST parameter 8 15 LOGFILE clause 8 87 Logging off conditionally 8 150 8 152 Oracle 6 2 8 65 SQL Plus 2 4 8 69 Logging on Oracle 6 2 6 3 8 49 SQL Plus 2 4 7 2 LOGIN SQL 3 17 7 4 including SET commands 3 17 sample commands to include 3 17 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 LONG columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 8 34 setting maximum width 8 109 setting retrieval size 8 109 LONG variable 8 109 effect on COPY command 6 8 8 53 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 4 7 8 34 8 109 MAXIMUM function 4 17 Media recovery 8 133 Message sending to screen 3 27 8 83 Index 10 MINIMUM function 4 17 MOUNT clause 8 132 Mounting shared databases 8 133 Mounting a database 8 132 N NCHAR clause VARIABLE command 8 144 NCHAR columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 4 6 8 34 NCLOB clause VARIABLE command 8 145 NCLOB columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 8 34 setting maximum width 8 109 setting retrieval position 8 109 setting retrieval size 8 109 Negative infinity sign 8 36 Net se
294. riable F 3 CMDSEP variable 8 104 COLSEP variable 4 36 8 104 COMPATIBILITY clause 3 17 COMPATIBILITY variable 8 105 CONCAT variable 3 25 8 105 COPYCOMMIT variable 6 8 8 105 COPYTYPECHECK variable 8 105 DEFINE clause 3 25 DEFINE variable 8 105 DESCRIBE variable 8 106 disabling E 5 DOCUMENT variable F 4 ECHO variable 3 14 8 106 EDITFILE variable 8 106 EMBEDDED variable 8 106 ESCAPE variable 3 25 8 106 FEEDBACK variable 8 107 FLAGGER variable 8 107 FLUSH variable 8 107 HEADING variable 8 107 HEADSEP variable 4 3 8 108 INSTANCE variable 8 108 LINESIZE variable 4 26 4 33 8 108 LOBOFFSET variable 8 109 LOGSOURCE variable 8 109 LONG variable 6 8 8 109 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 8 109 MAXDATA variable F 5 NEWPAGE variable 4 33 8 109 NULL variable 8 109 NUMFORMAT clause 3 17 NUMFORMAT variable 8 109 NUMWIDTH variable 4 4 8 36 8 109 PAGESIZE clause 3 17 PAGESIZE variable 2 7 4 33 8 110 PAUSE clause 3 17 PAUSE variable 2 17 8 110 RECSEP variable 4 10 8 110 RECSEPCHAR variable 4 10 8 110 SCAN variable F 5 SERVEROUTPUT variable 8 111 SHIFTINOUT clause 3 18 SHIFTINOUT variable 8 111 SPACE variable F 5 SQLBLANKLINES variable 8 111 SQLCASE variable 8 112 SQLCONTINUE variable 8 112 SQLNUMBER variable 8 112 SQLPREFIX variable 8 112 SQLPROMPT variable 8 112 SQLTERMINATOR variable 8 112 SUFFIX variable 8 112 TAB variable 8 113 TERMOUT variable 4 32 8 113 TIME clause
295. rocesses specified with DEGREE is used on each instance Thus the total number of recovery processes is the integer specified with DEGREE multiplied by the integer specified with INSTANCES INSTANCES is only pertinent for the Oracle Parallel Server PARALLEL INSTANCES DEFAULT INSTANCES DEFAULT or not including the INSTANCES keyword causes has operating system specific consequences For more information about the default behavior of the INSTANCES DEFAULT specification see the Oracle8i Parallel Server Concepts and Administration manual NOPARALLEL Specifies that recovery is to proceed serially Note that a specification of PARALLEL DEGREE 1 INSTANCES 1 is equivalent to specifying the NOPARALLEL keyword The PARALLEL keyword overrides the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM initialization parameter The number specified with the PARALLEL keyword is the number of recovery processes used to apply redo entries to datafiles For more information about the PARALLEL keyword see the Oracle8i Parallel Server Concepts and Administration manual Usage Notes Note you must be connected to Oracle as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot use the RECOVER command when connected via the multi threaded server To perform media recovery on an entire database all tablespaces the database must be mounted EXCLUSIVE and closed To perform media recovery on a tablespace the database must be mounted and open and the tablespace must be offline To perform media recovery on a
296. rsor is automatically opened by an OPEN FOR SELECT statement referencing the bind variable in a PL SQL block SQL Plus Command Reference 8 145 VARIABLE closes the cursor after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or on exit SQL Plus formatting commands such as BREAK COLUMN COMPUTE and SET may be used to format the output from PRINTing a REFCURSOR A REFCURSOR bind variable may not be PRINTed more than once without re executing the PL SQL OPEN FOR statement Examples The following example illustrates creating a bind variable and then setting it to the value returned by a function SQL gt VARIABLE id NUMBER SQL gt BEGIN 2 id emp management hire BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES 4 END The bind variable named id can be displayed with the PRINT command or used in subsequent PL SQL subprograms The following example illustrates automatically displaying a bind variable SQL gt SET AUTOPRINT ON SQL gt VARIABLE a REFCURSOR SQL gt BEGIN OPEN a FOR SELECT FROM DEPT ORDER BY DEPTNO N END PL SQL procedure successfully completed DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON In the above example there is no need to issue a PRINT command to display the varia
297. rt for gt the Month of May Command Reference 8 141 TTITLE Examples To define Monthly Analysis as the top title and to left align it to center the date to right align the page number with a three digit format and to display Data in Thousands in the center of the next line enter SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Monthly Analysis CENTER 23 Nov 98 gt RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP CENTER gt Data in Thousands The following title results Monthly Analysis 23 Nov 98 Page 1 Data in Thousands To suppress the top title display without changing its definition enter SQL gt TTITLE OFF 8 142 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference UNDEFINE UNDEFINE Purpose Deletes one or more user variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command Syntax UNDEF INE variable Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause variable Represents the name of the user variable you wish to delete One or more user variables may be deleted in the same command Examples To undefine a user variable named POS enter SQL gt UNDEFINE POS To undefine two user variables named MYVARI1 and MYVAR2 enter SQL gt UNDEFINE MYVAR1 MYVAR2 Command Reference 8 143 VARIABLE VARIABLE Purpose
298. rt of the full file specification Several standard file extensions are used to indicate the type or purpose of the file as in file extensions of SQL LOG LIS EXE BAT and DIR Called file type on some operating systems file A collection of data treated as a unit such as a list document index note set of procedures and so on Generally used to refer to data stored on magnetic tapes or disks See also filename extension and file type filename The name component of a file specification A filename is assigned by either the user or the system when the file itself is created See also extension and file type file type On some operating systems the part of the filename that usually denotes the use or purpose of the file See extension format Columns contain information in one of four types users can specify how they want a query to format information it retrieves from character number date or long columns For example they can choose to have information of type date appear as 23 11 98 or Monday Twenty third November 1998 or any other valid date format format model A clause element that controls the appearance of a value in a report column You specify predefined format models in the COLUMN TTITLE and BTITLE commands FORMAT clauses You can also use format models for DATE columns in SQL date conversion functions such as TO_DATE form feed A control character that when executed causes the printer to skip to
299. rvice names in DESCRIBE command 8 58 Net8 protocol 6 3 NEW_VALUE clause 4 30 8 37 storing current date in variable for titles 4 32 8 37 8 40 NEWLINE clause 8 37 NEWPAGE command F 3 NEWPAGE variable 4 33 8 109 NEXT clause 8 16 NLS_DATE_FORMAT 8 11 8 41 NOAUDIT command disabling E 6 NOLIST clause 8 71 NOLOG option 7 3 NOMOUNT clause 8 133 NONE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 150 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 152 NOPARALLEL clause 8 88 NOPRINT clause 4 17 4 30 8 38 NOPROMPT clause 8 12 NORMAL mode 8 127 NULL clause 8 38 Null values setting text displayed 8 38 8 109 NULL variable 8 109 NUMBER clause 3 29 8 11 VARIABLE command 8 144 NUMBER columns changing format 4 5 8 34 default format 4 4 8 36 Number formats 4 5 0 45 9 45 comma 4 5 setting default 8 109 NUMBER function 4 17 NUMFORMAT clause in LOGIN SQL 3 17 NUMFORMAT variable 8 109 NUMWIDTH variable 8 109 effect on NUMBER column format 4 4 8 36 NVARCHAR2 columns changing format 4 7 8 34 default format 4 6 8 34 O Objects describing 8 106 OF clause 4 16 OFF clause in ATTRIBUTE command 8 20 in COLUMN command 4 10 8 38 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 8 94 in SPOOL command 4 35 8 129 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 30 8 140 OLD_VALUE clause 4 31 8 38 ON clause in ATTRIBUTE command 8 20 in COLUMN command 4 10 8 38 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 30 ON column clause in
300. ry 0O sort disk 14 rows processed This option is useful when you are tuning a large query but do not want to see the query report Manipulating Commands 3 39 Tracing Statements Example 3 23 Tracing Statements Using a Database Link To trace a statement using a database link SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY EXPLAIN SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP MY_LINK Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT REMOTE Optimizer CHOOSE 1 O0 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP MY _LINK DB DOMAIN The Execution Plan shows the table being accessed on line 1 is via the database link MY_LINK DB_DOMAIN Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries When you trace a statement in a parallel or distributed query the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates of the number of rows the cardinality In general the cost cardinality and bytes at each node represent cumulative results For example the cost of a join node accounts for not only the cost of completing the join operations but also the entire costs of accessing the relations in that join Lines marked with an asterisk denote a parallel or remote operation Each operation is explained in the second part of the report See the Oracle8i Tuning guide for more information on parallel and distributed operations The second section of this report consists of three columns displayed in the followi
301. s 4 9 Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes ccccccesssesteseseeceeeseseeneteneeeees 4 10 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Value cccecccssssssesesesesesseenens 4 10 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines cccc cscs eeeeseeeees 4 11 Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns cccceeeceseeceesesteteteseecesesesnsneseseeenens 4 12 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes ccccscssseeeessteteseecenesesesnenenenens 4 13 Inserting Space after Every ROW ccccccsscscssssssesesescscsesesesescsesesesescscsssesesescsesssesesescseseseseeesees 4 14 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques ccccceeseesececsesessesecesssssssesessssseesssesssseeseseseseseesees 4 14 Listing and Removing Break Definitions 0 0 0 0 cece ccc ee ceeeeeeeneeeceneeeeenecesesesenesesenenees 4 16 Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes cccccsesseseees 4 16 Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report ccccsscesesceseseeeeneneesesnsneeneseees 4 20 Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines ccceeecc cesses eens eeceeeeseeneeseeneneneseees 4 21 Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions cce cesses sessessenesesesssseseseeesssenees 4 22 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions 0 0cc ccc cece cece ceeeeeee ce neeeneees 4 23 Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footer ccccceccessesescet
302. s for Later Use cccccccccssssestenesesesesneseseseecesesescsnananesesesceseseseecanenesesesnanenenees 3 8 Storing Commands in Command Files c ccc cece ee ssseeeseeesseeseseseseseseseecsesssssneseceees 3 8 Creating a Command File by Saving the Buffer Content 0ccce cece eenensseee 3 8 Creating a Command File by Using INPUT and SAVE c ccccceesseceesseteseeeecesesestenenenes 3 9 Creating Command Files with a System Editor cccccccccesescsteteseeeeeeteseeceesesesneneneneees 3 11 Placing Comments in Command Files cccccecssseesesecsesssesesescsesesesesesesesesesescsesessseseecseees 3 11 Using the REMARK Command cccccccecesecccesesescscscsesesescscsssesesescssssseseecsesessaeseeeseees 3 11 MSI fi E E cheat aes etch ies Aether A Lane eee Daa IE aes 3 12 NSH Si retest ctete cx ocecs cevsu Did Gusts dusts A we Sos devaee tected e ce diols a a a iaa 3 12 Retrieving Command Files ns ssrin ien aiaia aai ie Aaaa 3 13 Running Command Fil s issis heie i iaae asses ateatha aeaiia aeeti ii 3 14 Running a Command File as You Start SQL Plus 0 0 cece eseesesecenenseeeeseeneeseseees 3 15 Nesting Command Piles isictscissitdi Sikes cos derssedtttadvenliisheescutaastesvessaisratores aeiia 3 15 Modifying Command Files ccccscccesescecesesescensesesesesnesesesceceseseeceaneseseseeesesescecesesesesnsneneaeses 3 16 Exiting from a Command File with a Return Code cccceecscesesssesesesesensseseseseneeseseees 3 1
303. s retrieved or the value of SET LONG is reached SERVEROUTPUT To enable the display of DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE enter SQL gt SET SERVEROUTPUT ON The following example shows what happens when you execute an anonymous procedure with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete 3 END 4 Task is complete PL SQL procedure successfully completed The following example shows what happens when you create a trigger with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SQL gt CREATE TRIGGER SERVER_TRIG BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE gt OR DELETE 2 ON SERVER_TAB 3 BEGI 4 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete 5 END 6 Trigger created Command Reference 8 119 SET SQL gt INSERT INTO SERVER_TAB VALUES TEXT Task is complete 1 row created To set the output to WORD_WRAPPED enter SQL gt SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT WORD_WRAPPED SQL gt SET LINESIZE 20 SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do 3 DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B 4 end 5 If there is nothing left to do shall we continue with plan B To set the output to TRUNCATED enter SQL gt SET
304. s the case of SQL commands and PL SQL blocks just prior to execution SOL Plus converts all text within the command including quoted literals and identifiers as follows uppercase if SQLCASE equals UPPER lowercase if SQLCASE equals LOWER unchanged if SQLCASE equals MIXED SQLCASE does not change the SQL buffer itself SQLCO NTINUE gt text Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen SQLN UMBER OFF ON Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent lines of a SQL command or PL SQL block ON sets the prompt to be the line number OFF sets the prompt to the value of SQLPROMPT SQLPRE FIX c Sets the SQL Plus prefix character While you are entering a SQL command or PL SQL block you can enter a SQL Plus command on a separate line prefixed by the SQL Plus prefix character SQL Plus will execute the command immediately without affecting the SQL command or PL SQL block that you are entering The prefix character must be a non alphanumeric character SQLP ROMPT SQL gt text Sets the SQL Plus command prompt SQLT ERMINATOR c OFF ON Sets the character used to end and execute SQL commands to c OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no command terminator you terminate a SQL command by entering an empty line ON resets the terminator to the default semicolon SUF FIX SQOL text Sets the default file extension that
305. s the following information PROCEDURE aproc Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN PROCEDURE bproc Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN To create and describe the object type ADDRESS that contains the attributes STREFT and CITY enter SQL gt CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT 2 STREET VARCHAR2 20 3 CITY VARCHAR2 20 4 5 7 SQL gt DESCRIBE address 8 60 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type EMPLOYEE that contains the attributes ENAME EMPADDR JOB and SAL enter SQL gt CREATE TYPE PLOYEE AS OBJECT 2 ENAME VARCHAR2 30 3 EMPADDR ADDRESS 4 JOB VARCHAR2 20 5 SAL BER 7 2 6 P SQL gt DESCRIBE employee SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type ENAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB VARCHAR2 20 SAL BER 7 2 To create and describe the object type addr_type as a table of the object type ADDRESS enter SQ gt CREATE TYPE addr_type IS TABLE OF ADDRESS gt C 2 gt D SQL gt ES
306. s to the screen and receive input from the user including a simple Return You can also use PROMPT and ACCEPT to customize the prompts for values SQL Plus automatically generates for substitution variables Prompting for and Accepting User Variable Through PROMPT and ACCEPT you can send messages to the end user and accept values as end user input PROMPT simply displays a message you specify on screen use it to give directions or information to the user ACCEPT prompts the user for a value and stores it in the user variable you specify Use PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT when your prompt for the value spans more than one line Example 3 15 Prompting for and Accepting Input To direct the user to supply a report title and to store the input in the variable MYTITLE for use in a subsequent query first clear the buffer SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER Manipulating Commands 3 27 Writing Interactive Commands Next set up a command file as shown below SQL gt INPUT 1 PROMPT Enter a title up to 30 characters long 2 ACCEPT MYTITLE PROMPT Title 3 TTITLE LEF YTITLE SKIP 2 4 SELECT FROM DEPT 5 SQL gt SAVE PROMPT1 Created file PROMPT1 The TTITLE command sets the top title for your report This command is covered in detail in Chapter 4 Finally run the command file responding to the prompt for the title as shown SQL gt STA
307. semicolon is necessary to mark the end of the command when you enter it but SQL Plus does not store it in the SOL buffer This makes editing more convenient since it means you can add a new line to the end of the buffer without removing a semicolon from the line that was previously the last Manipulating Commands 3 3 Editing Commands Editing the Current Line The SQL Plus CHANGE command allows you to edit the current line Various actions determine which line is the current line a LIST a given line to make it the current line a When you LIST or RUN the command in the buffer the last line of the command becomes the current line Note that using the slash command to run the command in the buffer does not affect the current line If you get an error message the line containing the error automatically becomes the current line Example 3 2 Making an Error in Command Entry Suppose you try to select the DEPTNO column but mistakenly enter it as DPTNO Enter the following command purposely misspelling DEPTNO in the first line SQL gt SELECT DPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 10 You see this message on your screen SELECT DPTNO ENAME SAL ERROR at line 1 ORA 0904 invalid column name Examine the error message it indicates an invalid column name in line 1 of the query The asterisk shows the point of error the mistyped col
308. sera Changing password for usera New password passusera Retype new password passusera Password changed 8 80 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PAUSE PAUSE Purpose Displays an empty line followed by a line containing text then waits for the user to press Return or displays two empty lines and waits for the user s response Syntax PAU SE text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term text Represents the text you wish to display Enter PAUSE followed by no text to display two empty lines Usage Notes Because PAUSE always waits for the user s response it is best to use a message that tells the user explicitly to press Return PAUSE reads input from the terminal if a terminal is available even when you have designated the source of the command input as a file For information on pausing between pages of a report see the PAUSE variable of the SET command later in this chapter Example To print Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue and to have SQL Plus wait for the user to press Return you might include the following PAUSE command in a command file SET PAUSE OFF PAUSE Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue SELECT Command Reference 8 81 PRINT PRINT Purpose Displays the current value of bind variables For more information on bind variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Syntax
309. set of two or more online redo log files that record all committed changes made to the database open database A database that has been mounted and opened by an instance and is available for access by users If a database is open users can access the information it contains See also mounted database operating system The system software that manages a computer s resources performing basic tasks such as allocating memory and allowing computer components to communicate Oracle Forms A non procedural tool for creating maintaining and running full screen interactive applications called forms in order to see and change data in an Oracle database A fourth generation language for creating interactive screens for use in block mode character mode or bit mapped environments It has a define time and a runtime component Oracle RDBMS The relational database management system RDBMS developed by Oracle Corporation Components of the RDBMS include the kernel and various utilities for use by database administrators and database users Oracle Server The relational database management system RDBMS sold by Oracle Corporation Components of Oracle Server include the kernel and various utilities for use by DBAs and database users output Results of a report after it is run Output can be displayed on a screen stored in a file or printed on paper output file File to which the computer transfers data Glossary 15 Glossary
310. splay or print record separators A record separator consists of a single line of the RECSEPCHAR record separating character repeated LINESIZE times RECSEPCHAR defines the record separating character A single space is the default RECSEP tells SOL Plus where to make the record separation For example if you set RECSEP to WRAPPED SQL Plus prints a record separator only after wrapped lines If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a record separator following every row If you set RECSEP to OFF SQL Plus does not print a record separator SERVEROUT PUT OFF ON SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D WRAPPED TRU NCATED Controls whether to display the output that is DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_ LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus OFF suppresses the output of DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE ON displays the output SIZE sets the number of bytes of the output that can be buffered within the Oracle8i database server The default for n is 2000 n cannot be less than 2000 or greater than 1 000 000 8 110 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET When WRAPPED is enabled SQL Plus wraps the server output within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAPPED is enabled each line of server output is wrapped within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE Lines are broken on word boundaries SQL Plus left justifies each line skipping all leading whitespace When TRUNCATED is enab
311. stem variable called PAGESIZE Whether you see the message concerning the number of records retrieved depends on the setting of a system variable called FEEDBACK You will learn more about system variables later in this chapter in the section Variables that Affect Running Commands To save space the number of records selected will not be shown in the rest of the examples in this Guide Understanding SQL Command Syntax Just as spoken language has syntax rules that govern the way we assemble words into sentences SOL Plus has syntax rules that govern how you assemble words into commands You must follow these rules if you want SQL Plus to accept and execute your commands Dividing a SQL Command into Separate Lines You can divide your SQL command into separate lines at any points you wish as long as individual words are not split between lines Thus you can enter the query you entered in Example 2 3 on one line SQL gt SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 7 Entering and Executing Commands You can also enter the query on several lines SQL gt SELECT 2 EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 3 FROM EMP 4 WHERE SAL lt 2500 In this Guide you will find most SQL commands divided into clauses one clause on each line In Example 2 3 for instance the SELECT and FROM clauses were placed on separate lines Many peo
312. systems SQL Plus may instruct your printer to print bolded text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See 8 94 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER COLUMN FORMAT for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Refer to the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter for more information on default formats Enter REPHEADER with no clauses to list the current REPHEADER definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPHEADER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Example To define EMPLOYEE LISTING REPO
313. t EXECUTE dept_rpt odcv PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable SQL gt PRINT odcv DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON The procedure can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable SQL gt VARIABLE pcv REFCURSOR SQL gt EXECUTE dept_rpt pcv PL SQL procedure successfully completed SQL gt PRINT pcv DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Example 3 20 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Functions Create a stored function containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement FUNCTION dept_fn RETURN tCurTyp ECT FROM DEPT SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE gt cv_types DeptCurTyp IS 2 resultset cv_types Dep 3 BEGI 4 OPEN resultset FOR SEL 5 RETURN resultset 6 END T Function created 3 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Execute the function SQL gt VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR SQ gt EXECUTE rc dept_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable SQL gt PRINT rc DEPTNO DNAI LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 4 rows sel
314. t session such as a the display width for NUMBER data the display width for LONG data enabling or disabling the printing of column headings the number of lines per page Syntax SET system_variable value where system_variable value represents a system variable followed by a value as shown below APPI NFO ON OFF text ARRAY SIZE 15 n AUTO COMMIT OFF ON IMM EDIATE n AUTOP RINT OFE ON AUTORECOVERY ON OFF AUTOT RACE OFF ON TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS BLO CKTERMINATOR c CMDS EP 7 C OFF ON COLSEP _ text COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE CON CAT c OFF ON COPYC OMMIT 0 n COPYTYPECHECK OFF ON EF INE amp c OFF ON SCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF CHO OFF ON I B ea F ILE file_name ext EDDED OFF ON ESC APE c OFF ON FEED BACK 6 n OFF ON FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED TATE FULL FLU SH OFF ON HEA DING OFF ON H I EADS EP 1 c OFF ON STANCE instance path LOCAL 8 100 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET LIN ESIZE 80 n LOBOF FSET n 1 LOGSOURCE pathname LONG 80 n LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n EWP AGE 1 n NONE ULL text F ORMAT
315. ta exist so that changes can be stored or the data can be restored to its prior state computation Used to perform runtime calculations on data fetched from the database These calculations are a superset of the kinds of calculations that can be done directly with a SELECT statement See also formula column computed column See computation configuration In Net8 the set of instructions for preparing network communications as outlined in the Net8 documentation configuration files Files that are used to identify and characterize the components of a network Configuration is largely a process of naming network components and identifying relationships among those components connect To identify yourself to Oracle by entering your username and password in order to gain access to the database In SQL Plus the CONNECT command allows you to log off Oracle and then log back on with a specified username connect string The set of parameters including a protocol that Net8 uses to connect to a specific Oracle instance on the network current line In an editor such as the SQL Plus editor the line in the current buffer that editing commands will currently affect database A set of operating system files treated as a unit in which an Oracle database server stores a set of data dictionary tables and user tables A database requires three types of files database files redo log files and control files database administrator
316. ted Oracle instance shut down 8 128 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SPOOL SPOOL Purpose Stores query results in an operating system file and optionally sends the file to a printer Syntax SPO OL file_name ext OFF OUT Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the name of the file to which you wish to spool SPOOL followed by file_name begins spooling displayed output to the named file If you do not specify an extension SPOOL uses a default extension LST or LIS on most systems OFF Stops spooling OUT Stops spooling and sends the file to your host computer s standard default printer Enter SPOOL with no clauses to list the current spooling status Usage Notes To spool output generated by commands in a command file without displaying the output on the screen use SET TERMOUT OFF SET TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands run interactively Examples To record your displayed output in a file named DIARY using the default file extension enter SQL gt SPOOL DIARY To stop spooling and print the file on your default printer enter SQL gt SPOOL OUT Command Reference 8 129 START START Purpose Executes the contents of the specified command file Syntax STA RT file_name ext arg Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause fi
317. ted until the account is unlocked by your DBA You can disconnect the username currently connected to Oracle without leaving SQL Plus by entering the SQL Plus command DISCONNECT at the SQL Plus command prompt The default database is configured at an operating system level by setting operating system environment variables symbols or possibly by editing an Oracle specific configuration file Refer to your Oracle documentation for your operating system for more information Connecting to a Remote Database Many large installations run Oracle on more than one computer Such computers are often connected in a network which permits programs on different computers to exchange data rapidly and efficiently Networked computers can be physically near each other or can be separated by large distances and connected by telecommunication links 6 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Connecting to a Remote Database Databases on other computers or databases on your host computer other than your default database are called remote databases You can access remote databases if the desired database has Net8 and both databases have compatible network drivers You can connect to a remote database in one of two ways a from within SQL Plus using the CONNECT command as you start SOL Plus using the SQLPLUS command Connecting to a Remote Database from within SQL Plus To connect to a remote database using CONNECT include a Net8 database speci
318. ter and carriage return you enter with a space in the resulting variable For example SQL Plus interprets SQL gt DEFINE TEXT ONE gt TWO gt HREE as SQL gt DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THREE Examples To assign the value MANAGER to the variable POS type SQL gt DEFINE POS MANAGER If you execute a command that contains a reference to amp POS SQL Plus will substitute the value MANAGER for amp POS and will not prompt you for a POS value To assign the CHAR value 20 to the variable DEPTNO type SQL gt DEFINE DEPTNO 20 Even though you enter the number 20 SQL Plus assigns a CHAR value to DEPTINO consisting of two characters 2 and 0 To list the definition of DEPTNO enter SQL gt DEFINE DEPTNO DEFINE DEPTNO 20 CHAR This result shows that the value of DEPTNO is 20 Command Reference 8 55 DEL DEL Purpose Deletes one or more lines of the buffer Syntax Terms and Clauses DEL n n mijn n LAST n LAST LAST Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause n nm n n LAST n LAST LAST Deletes line n Deletes lines n through m Deletes line n through the current line Deletes line n through the last line Deletes the current line Deletes the current line through line n Deletes the current line thr
319. ters in the command file If you enter one or more arguments SOL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the command file The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The command DEFINEs the parameters with the values of the arguments if you run the command file again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the current values For more information on using parameters refer to the subsection Passing Parameters through the START Command under Writing Interactive Commands in Chapter 3 8 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference at sign Usage Notes You can include in a command file any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL SQL Plus commands or PL SQL blocks An EXIT or QUIT command used in a command file terminates SQL Plus The command functions similarly to START If the START command is disabled see Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands in Appendix E this will also disable the command See START in this chapter for information on the START command SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR See the SQLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information Examples To run a command file named PRINTRPT
320. tes and indicate the system resources required to execute your statement The client referred to in the statistics is SOL Plus SQL Net refers to the generic process communication between SQL Plus and the server regardless of whether Net8 is installed You cannot change the default format of the statistics report For more information about the statistics and how to interpret them see the Oracle8i Tuning guide Example 3 21 Tracing Statements for Performance Statistics and Query Execution Path If the SOL buffer contains the following statement SQL gt SELECT D DNAME E ENAME E SAL E JOB 2 FROM EMP E DEPT D 3 WHERE E DEPTNO D DEPTNO The statement can be automatically traced when it is run SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE ON SQL gt Manipulating Commands 3 37 Tracing Statements DNAME ENAME SAL JOB ACCOUNTING CLARK 2450 MANAGER ACCOUNTING KING 5000 PRESIDENT ACCOUNTING ILLER 1300 CLERK RESEARCH SMITH 800 CLERK RESEARCH ADAMS 1100 CLERK RESEARCH FORD 3000 ANALYST RESEARCH SCOTT 3000 ANALYST RESEARCH JONES 2975 MANAGER SALES ALLE 1600 SALESMAN SALES BLAKE 2850 MANAGER SALES MARTIN 1250 SALESMAN SALES JAMES 950 CLERK SALES TURNER 1500 SALESMAN SALES WARD 1250 SALESMAN
321. th single or double quotes Each occurrence of the HEADSEP character by default begins a new line 8 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN For example COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee Name would produce a two line column heading See the HEADSEP variable of the SET command in this chapter for information on changing the HEADSEP character JUS TIFY L EFT C ENTER C ENTRE R IGHT Aligns the heading If you do not use a JUSTIFY clause headings for NUMBER columns default to RIGHT and headings for other column types default to LEFT LIKE expr alias Copies the display attributes of another column or expression whose attributes you have already defined with another COLUMN command LIKE copies only attributes not defined by another clause in the current COLUMN command NEWL INE Starts a new line before displaying the column s value NEWLINE has the same effect as FOLD_BEFORE NEW_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the variable in TTITLE commands Use NEW_VALUE to display column values or the date in the top title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action The variable name cannot contain a pound sign NEW_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause See the
322. th username SCOTT and password TIGER enter SQL gt SOLPLUS SCOTT TIGER To start SQL Plus as above and to make POLICY the default database where POLICY is a valid Net8 database connection string enter SQL gt SOLPLUS SCOTT TIGER POLICY To start SQL Plus with username SCOTT and password TIGER and run a command file named STARTUP with the extension SQL enter SQL gt SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER STARTUP Note the space between TIGER and STARTUP Example 7 2 Displaying the SQLPLUS syntax To display the syntax of the SQLPLUS command enter SQL gt SOQLPLUS 7 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Getting Help SQL Plus displays the following Usage SQLPLUS lt option gt lt user gt password gt lt host gt lt startfile gt lt parml gt lt parm2 gt where lt option gt s s for silent mode and to obtain version number Getting Help To access online help for SQL Plus commands you can type HELP followed by the command name at the SQL command prompt For example SQL gt HELP ACCEPT If you get a response that help is unavailable consult your database administrator See the HELP command in Chapter 8 for more information Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 5 Getting Help 7 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 8 Command Reference This chapter contains descriptions of SQL Plus commands listed alphabetically Use this chapter for refer
323. that enables SQL Plus to automatically commit changes to the database after every successful execution of a SQL command or PL SQL block Setting the AUTOCOMMIT variable of the SET command to ON enables this feature Setting the AUTOCOMMIT variable to n enables this feature after every n successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks background process A non interactive process that runs in an operating system environment and performs some service or action Certain Oracle database server products use background processes for different tasks such as performing and coordinating tasks on behalf of concurrent users of the database processing and delivering electronic messages and managing printing services bind reference A reference to a parameter used to replace a single literal value for example a character string number or date appearing anywhere in a PL SQL construct or a SQL SELECT statement For a bind reference you must precede the parameter name with a colon bind variable A variable in a SQL statement that must be replaced with a valid value or the address of a value in order for the statement to successfully execute bit The smallest unit of data A bit only has two possible values 0 or 1 Bits can be combined into groups of eight called bytes each byte represents a single character of data See also byte block In PL SQL a group of SQL and PL SQL commands related to each other through proced
324. the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b in a BREAK command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command The information given above for ON column also applies to ON expr ON ROW action action When you include action s specifies action s for SQL Plus to take when a SQL SELECT command returns a row The ROW break becomes the innermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command You should always specify an action when you BREAK ona row ON REPORT action Marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command Use BREAK ON REPORT in conjunction with COMPUTE to print grand totals or other grand computed values The REPORT break becomes the outermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command Note that SQL Plus will not skip a page at the end of a report so you cannot use BREAK ON REPORT SKIP PAGE Refer to the following list for a description of each action SKI P n Skips n lines before printing the row where the break occurred Command Reference 8 23 BREAK SKI P PAGE Skips the number of lines that are defined to be a page before printing the row where the break occurred The number of lines per page can be set via the PAGESIZE clause of the SET command Note that PAGESIZE only changes the number of lines that SQL Plus considers to be a pa
325. the command To disable the command for more than one user use SQL wild cards or make multiple entries Thus all of the following entries are valid a SCOTT a CLASS1 a CLASS all users whose names start with CLASS a all users Must contain the name in uppercase of the SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command you wish to disable for example GET If you are disabling a role it must contain the character string ROLES You cannot enter a wildcard See the section Administration later in this chapter for a list of SQL and SQL Plus commands you can disable See the section Roles in this chapter for information on how to disable a role Security E 3 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Scope SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store specific file restrictions or other data in this column Numeric_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store numeric values in this column Char_Value Must contain the character string DISABLED to disable a SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command If you are disabling a role it must contain the name of the role you wish to disable You cannot use a wildcard See Roles below for information on how to disable a role Date_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store DATE values in this column Lo
326. the file using the SQL Plus START command The start clause requires the following syntax file_name ext arg See the START command in Chapter 8 for more information You have the option of entering logon If you do not specify logon and do specify start SQL Plus assumes that the first line of the command file contains a valid logon If neither start nor logon are specified SQL Plus prompts for logon information Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause S ILENT Suppresses all SQL Plus information and prompt messages including the command prompt the echoing of commands and the banner normally displayed when you start SQL Plus Use SILENT to invoke SQL Plus within another program so that the use of SQL Plus is invisible to the user username password Represent the username and password with which you wish to start SQL Plus and connect to Oracle If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you enter a slash or simply enter Return to the prompt for username SQL Plus logs you in using a default logon see below If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen 7 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command net_service_name Consists of a Net8 connection string The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol y
327. the top of a new sheet of paper top of form When SQL Plus displays a form feed on most terminals the form feed clears the screen formula column Manually created column that gets its data from a PL SQL procedure function or expression user exit SOL statement or any combination of these function A PL SQL subprogram that executes an operation and returns a value at the completion of the operation A function can be either built in or user named Contrast with procedure heading In SQL Plus text that names an output column appearing above the column See also column heading host computer The computer from which you run SQL Plus instance The background processes and memory area required to access an Oracle database A database system requires one instance and one database An Oracle database server consists of an SGA and a set of Oracle database server system processes instance failure See database instance failure Glossary 11 Glossary 12 instance recovery Recovery of an instance in the event of software or hardware failure so that the database is again available to users If the instance terminates abnormally then the instance recovery automatically occurs at the next instance startup Julian date An algorithm for expressing a date in integer form using the SQL function JDATE Julian dates allow additional arithmetic functions to be performed on dates justification See alignment label Defines
328. ting Query Results 4 13 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 ILLER 300 20 SMITH 800 ADAMS 100 30 ALLE 1600 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 Inserting Space after Every Row You may wish to insert blank lines or a blank page after every row To skip n lines after every row use BREAK in the following form BREAK ON ROW SKIP n To skip a page after every row use BREAK ON ROW SKIP PAGE Note SKIP PAGE does not cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques Suppose you have more than one column in your ORDER BY clause and wish to insert space when each column s value changes Each BREAK command you enter replaces the previous one Thus if you want to use different spacing techniques in one report or insert space after the value changes in more than one ordered column you must specify multiple columns and actions in a single BREAK command 4 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Example 4 11 Combining Spacing Techniques First add another column to the current query SQL gt L 1 SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 0 4 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL gt SELECT
329. tion Variables You can use substitution variables anywhere in SQL and SQL Plus commands except as the first word entered at the command prompt When SQL Plus encounters an undefined substitution variable in a command SQL Plus prompts you for the value You can enter any string at the prompt even one containing blanks and punctuation If the SQL command containing the reference should have quote marks around the variable and you do not include them there the user must include the quotes when prompted SQL Plus reads your response from the keyboard even if you have redirected terminal input or output to a file If a terminal is not available if for example you run the command file in batch mode SQL Plus uses the redirected file After you enter a value at the prompt SQL Plus lists the line containing the substitution variable twice once before substituting the value you enter and once after substitution You can suppress this listing by setting the SET command variable VERIFY to OFF Manipulating Commands 3 21 Writing Interactive Commands Example 3 12 Using Substitution Variables Create a command file named STATS to be used to calculate a subgroup statistic the maximum value on a numeric column SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER SQL gt INPUT 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM 3 FRO amp TABLI 4 GROUP BY amp GROU e Bl P_COL 5 SQL gt SAVE STATS
330. tion on your operating system Setting Up the Site Profile SQL Plus supports a Site Profile a SQL Plus command file created by the database administrator This file is generally named GLOGIN with an extension of SQL SQL Plus executes this command file whenever any user starts SQL Plus and Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 3 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command SQL Plus establishes the Oracle connection The Site Profile allows the DBA to set up SQL Plus environment defaults for all users at a particular site users cannot directly access the Site Profile The default name and location of the Site Profile depend on your system Site Profiles are described in more detail in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Setting Up the User Profile SQL Plus also supports a User Profile executed after the Site Profile SQL Plus searches for a file named LOGIN with the extension SQL in your current directory If SQL Plus does not find the file there SQL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support this path search Receiving a Return Code If you fail to log in successfully to SQL Plus because your username or password is invalid or some other error SQL Plus will return an error status equivalent to an EXIT FAILURE command See the EXIT command in this chapter for further information Example 7 1 Starting SQL Plus To start SQL Plus wi
331. to be committed after a specified number of successful SQL DML transactions A SQL DML transaction is either an UPDATE INSERT or DELETE command or a PL SQL block You control the autocommit feature with the SQL Plus SET command s AUTOCOMMIT variable It has these four forms SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Turns autocommit on SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF Turns autocommit off the default SET AUTOCOMMIT n Commits changes after n SQL commands or PL SQL blocks SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Turns autocommit on Example 2 5 Turning Autocommit On To turn the autocommit feature on enter SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Alternatively you can enter the following to turn the autocommit feature on SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Until you change the setting of AUTOCOMMIT SQL Plus will automatically commit changes from each SQL command or PL SQL block that specifies changes to the database After each autocommit SQL Plus displays the following message commit complete When the autocommit feature is turned on you cannot roll back changes to the database 2 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands To commit changes to the database after a number of SQL DML commands or PL SQL blocks for example ten enter SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT 10 SQL Plus counts SQL DML commands and PL SQL blocks as they are executed and commits the changes after the tenth SQL DML command
332. to complete prohibits further connects and closes and dismounts the database Finally shuts down the instance Does not wait for connected users to disconnect Does not require instance recovery on next startup Waits for currently connected users to disconnect from the database prohibits further connects and closes and dismounts the database Finally shuts down the instance Does not require instance recovery on next startup NORMAL is the default option TRANSACTIONAL Performs shutdown of an instance while minimizing interruption to clients No client can start a new transaction on the instance If a client attempts to start a new transaction they are disconnected After all transactions have either been committed or aborted any client still connected to the instance is disconnected At this point the instance shuts down just as it would when a SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE is submitted Command Reference 8 127 SHUTDOWN Using SHUTDOWN TRANSACTIONAL prevents clients from losing work and at the same time does not require all users to log off Usage Notes SHUTDOWN with no arguments is equivalent to SHUTDOWN NORMAL You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot connect via a multi threaded server For more information about connecting to a database see the CONNECT command earlier in this chapter Example To shutdown the database in normal mode enter SQL gt SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismoun
333. to determine that user s profile and privileges Creating the Table You can create PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE by running the command file named PUPBLD with the extension SQL as SYSTEM The exact format of the file extension and the location of the file are system dependent See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system or your DBA for more information Note If the table is created incorrectly all users other than SYSTEM will see a warning when connecting to Oracle that the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE information is not loaded E 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Table Structure The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table consists of the following columns PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUME RIC _ VALUE CHAR VALUE DATE_VALUE LONG_VALUE NOT NULL CHAR 30 CHAR 30 CHAR 240 CHAR 240 NUMBER 15 2 CHAR 240 DATE LONG Description and Use of Columns Refer to the following list for the descriptions and use of each column in the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table Product Userid Attribute Must contain the product name in this case SQL Plus You cannot enter wildcards or NULL in this column Also notice that the product name SQL Plus must be specified in mixed case as shown in order to be recognized Must contain the username in uppercase of the user for whom you wish to disable
334. u specify a column or expression in a BREAK command use an ORDER BY clause specifying the same column or expression If you do not do this the breaks may appear to occur randomly 4 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Example 4 9 Suppressing Duplicate Values in a Break Column To suppress the display of duplicate department numbers in the query results shown above enter the following commands SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 ILLER 1300 20 SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 30 ALLE 1600 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes You can insert blank lines or begin a new page each time the value changes in the break column To insert n blank lines use the BREAK command in the following form BREAK ON break_column SKIP n To skip a page use the command in this form BREAK ON break_column SKIP PAGE Example 4 10 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes To place one blank line between departments enter the following command SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP 1 Now rerun the query SQL gt Format
335. u turn spooling off using the following form of SPOOL SPOOL OFF Formatting Query Results 4 35 Storing and Printing Query Results Creating a Flat File When moving data between different software products it is sometimes necessary to use a flat file an operating system file with no escape characters headings or extra characters embedded For example if you do not have Net8 you need to create a flat file for use with SQL Loader when moving data from Oracle7 to Oracle8 To create a flat file with SQL Plus you first must enter the following SET commands SE EWPAGE 0 SET SPACE 0 SET LINESIZE 80 SET PAGESIZE 0 SET ECHO OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET HEADING OFE After entering these commands you use the SPOOL command as shown in the previous section to create the flat file The SET COLSEP command may be useful to delineate the columns For more information see the SET command in Chapter 8 Sending Results to a Printer To print query results spool them to a file as described in the previous section Then instead of using SPOOL OFF enter the command in the following form SPOOL OUT SQL Plus stops spooling and copies the contents of the spooled file to your host computer s standard default printer SPOOL OUT does not delete the spool file after printing Example 4 25 Sending Query Results to a Printer To generate a final report and sp
336. umentation please report them to us in writing Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation If the Programs are delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing or using the Programs on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement Otherwise Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 Oracle is a registered trademark and JDeveloper Oracle Designer Oracle Developer Oracle Discoverer Oracle7 Oracle8 Oracle8i Oracle Media Objects Oracle Mobile Agents Oracle Application Server PL SQL Oracle Programmer SQL Forms Net8 and SQL Plus are trademarks or r
337. umn DPTNO Instead of re entering the entire command you can correct the mistake by editing the command in the buffer The line containing the error is now the current line Use the CHANGE command to correct the mistake This command has three parts separated by slashes or any other non alphanumeric character the word CHANGE or the letter C a the sequence of characters you want to change the replacement sequence of characters The CHANGE command finds the first occurrence in the current line of the character sequence to be changed and changes it to the new sequence If you wish to re enter an entire line you do not need to use the CHANGE command re enter 3 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Commands the line by typing the line number followed by a space and the new text and pressing Return Example 3 3 Correcting the Error To change DPTNO to DEPTNO change the line with the CHANGE command SQL gt CHANGE DPTNO DEPTNO The corrected line appears on your screen 1 SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL Now that you have corrected the error you can use the RUN command to run the command again SQL gt RUN SOL Plus lists the command and then runs it ECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL FRO EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 10 DEPTNO ENAME SALARY 10 CLARK 2 450 10 KING 5 000 10 MILLER 1 300 Note that the column SAL reta
338. ur operating system s alias for HOST such as on VMS and on UNIX a QUIT a PASSWORD a RUN a SAVE a SET see note below a SPOOL a START Note Disabling the SQL Plus SET command will also disable the SQL SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION commands Disabling the SQL Plus START command will also disable the SQL Plus and commands Security E 5 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table You can also disable the following SQL commands a ALTER a ANALYZE s AUDIT a CONNECT a CREATE a DELETE a DROP a GRANT a INSERT a LOCK a NOAUDIT a RENAME a REVOKE a SELECT a SET ROLE a SET TRANSACTION a TRUNCATE a UPDATE You can also disable the following PL SQL commands a BEGIN a DECLARE Note Disabling BEGIN and DECLARE does not prevent the use of the SQL Plus EXECUTE command EXECUTE must be disabled separately E 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Disabling SET ROLE From SQL Plus users can submit any SQL command In certain situations this can cause security problems Unless you take proper precautions a user could use SET ROLE to access privileges obtained via an application role With these privileges they might issue SQL statements from SQL Plus that could wrongly change database tables To prevent application users from accessing application roles in SQL Plus you can use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE to disable the SET ROLE command This allows a SQL
339. ural logic body A report region that contains the bulk of the report text graphics data and computations break An event such as a change in the value of an expression that occurs while SQL Plus processes a query or report You can direct SQL Plus to perform various operations such as printing subtotals whenever specified breaks occur break column A column in a report that causes a break when its value changes and for which the user has defined break operations break group A group containing one or more break columns break hierarchy The order in which SQL Plus checks for the occurrence of breaks and triggers the corresponding break operations break order Indicates the order in which to display a break column s data Valid options are Ascending and Descending break report A report that divides rows of a table into sets based on a common value in the break column Glossary 3 Glossary 4 buffer An area where the user s SQL statements or PL SQL blocks are temporarily stored The SQL buffer is the default buffer You can edit or execute commands from multiple buffers however SQL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers byte A group of eight sequential bits that represents a letter number or symbol that is a character Treated as a unit of data by a computer CHAR datatype An Oracle datatype provided for ANSI ISO compatibility A CHAR column is a fixed length column and can contai
340. us Limits Item Limit filename length username length user variable name length user variable value length command line length length of a LONG value entered through SQL Plus LINESIZE LONGCHUNKSIZE value output line size line size after variable substitution number of characters in a COPMUTE command label number of lines per SQL command maximum PAGESIZE total row width maximum ARRAYSIZE maximum number of nested command files maximum page number maximum PL SQL error message size maximum ACCEPT character string length maximum number of DEFINE variables system dependent 30 bytes 30 bytes 240 characters 2500 characters LINESIZE value system dependent system dependent system dependent 3 000 characters internal only 500 characters 500 assuming 80 characters per line 50 000 lines 60 000 characters for VMS otherwise 32 767 characters 5000 rows 20 for VMS CMS Unix otherwise 5 99 999 2K 240 Bytes 2048 C 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference D SQL Command List Table D 1 on the following page lists major SQL commands Refer to the Oracle8i SQL Reference for full documentation of these commands SQL Command List D 1 Table D 1 SQL Command List Major SQL Commands and Clauses ALTER ANALYZE AUDIT COMMENT CREATE DROP EXPLAIN GRANT INSERT LOCK TABLE NOAUDIT RENAME REVOKE SAVEPOINT SET ROLE SET TRANSACTION TRUNCATE
341. us User s Guide and Reference explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command SQL Plus Command Summary Command Description VARIABLE Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL WHENEVER OSERROR Exits SQL Plus if an operating system command generates an error WHENEVER SQLERROR Exits SOL Plus if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error Command Reference 8 5 at sign at sign Purpose Runs the specified command file Syntax file_name ext arg Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the command file you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter When you enter file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SOL Plus does not find such a file SOL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search Consult the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Represent data items you wish to pass to parame
342. use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT to copy data between Oracle databases 6 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another Understanding COPY Command Syntax You enter the COPY command in the following form SQL gt COPY FROM database TO database action gt destination_table column_name column_name gt column name USING query Here is a sample COPY command SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt TO TODD FOX CHICAGODB gt CREATE NEWDEPT DNUMBER DNAME CITY gt USING SELECT FROM DEPT To specify a database in the FROM or TO clause you must have a valid username and password for the local and remote database s and know the appropriate service name s COPY obeys Oracle security so the username you specify must have been granted access to tables for you to have access to tables For information on what databases are available to you contact your DBA When you copy to your local database from a remote database you can omit the TO clause When you copy to a remote database from your local database you can omit the FROM clause When you copy between remote databases you must include both clauses The COPY command behaves differently based on whether the destination table already exists and on the action clause you enter CREATE in the example above For more information see the section Co
343. ust be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable LIKE type_name attribute_name alias Copies the display characteristics of another attribute LIKE copies only characteristics not defined by another clause in the current ATTRIBUTE command ON OFF Controls the status of display characteristics for a column OFF disables the characteristics for an attribute without affecting the characteristics definition ON reinstates the characteristics Usage Notes You can enter any number of ATTRIBUTE commands for one or more attributes All attribute characteristics set for each attribute remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the attribute OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the ATTRIBUTE commands you enter can control an attribute s display characteristics for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple ATTRIBUTE commands for the same attribute SOL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several ATTRIBUTE commands apply the same clause to the same attribute the last one entered will control the output Examples To make the ENAME attribute of the Object Type EMP_TYPE 20 characters wide enter SQL gt ATTRIBUTE EMP_TYPE ENAME FORMAT A20 To format the SAL attribute of the Object Type EMP_T
344. ustralia Pty Limited 324 St Kilda Road Melbourne VIC 3004 Australia 61 3 9209 1600 telephone 61 3 9690 0043 fax sqlplus us oracle com email XV xvi Send Us Your Comments SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 8 1 5 Part No A66736 01 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this publication Your input is an important part of the information used for revision Did you find any errors Is the information clearly presented Do you need more information If so where Are the examples correct Do you need more examples What features did you like most about this manual If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the chapter section and page number if available You can send comments to us in the following ways Electronic mail sqlplus us oracle com FAX 61 3 9690 0043 Attention SQL Plus Documentation Manager Postal service SQL Plus Documentation Manager Australian Product Development Center Oracle Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 324 St Kilda Road Melbourne VIC 3004 Australia If you would like a reply please give your name address and telephone number below If you have problems with the software please contact your local Oracle Support Services center xvii xviii Part I Understanding SQL Plus This section provides an introduction to SQL Plus It provides an o
345. verview of how to run SQL Plus and demonstrates this with various examples The following chapters are covered in this section a Introduction Learning SQL Plus Basics a Manipulating Commands Formatting Query Results a Database Administration Accessing SQL Databases 1 Introduction This chapter introduces you to SQL Plus covering the following topics a Overview of SQL Plus Using this Guide a What You Need to Run SQL Plus Introduction 1 1 Overview of SQL Plus Overview of SQL Plus You can use the SQL Plus program in conjunction with the SQL database language and its procedural language extension PL SQL The SQL database language allows you to store and retrieve data in Oracle PL SQL allows you to link several SQL commands through procedural logic SQL Plus enables you to manipulate SQL commands and PL SQL blocks and to perform many additional tasks as well Through SQL Plus you can Basic Concepts enter edit store retrieve and run SOL commands and PL SQL blocks format perform calculations on store and print query results in the form of reports list column definitions for any table access and copy data between SQL databases send messages to and accept responses from an end user perform database administration The following definitions explain concepts central to SQL Plus command An instruction you give SQL Plus or Oracle block A group of SQL and PL SQL commands related to on
346. wing the command displays all initialization parameters 8 124 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW Note your output may vary depending on the version and configuration of the Oracle database server to which you are connected PNO Shows the current page number REL EASE Shows the release number of Oracle that SQL Plus is accessing REPF OOTER Shows the current REPFOOTER definition REPH EADER Shows the current REPHEADER definition SPOO L Shows whether output is being spooled SGA Displays information about the current instance s System Global Area SQLCODE Shows the value of SQL SQLCODE the SQL return code of the most recent operation TTI TLE Shows the current TTITLE definition USER Shows the username under which you are currently accessing SQL Plus Examples To list the current LINESIZE enter SQL gt SHOW LINESIZE If the current linesize equals 80 characters SQL Plus will give the following response linesize 80 Command Reference 8 125 SHOW The following example illustrates how to create a stored procedure and then show its compilation errors SQL gt connect system manager SQL gt create procedure scott procl as SQL gt begin SQL gt pL 1 SQL gt end SQL gt Warning Procedure created with compilation errors SQL gt show errors Errors for PROCEDURE SCOTT PROC1 LINE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 SQL
347. with WORD_WRAP REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 86 144 This order must be shipped by air freight to ORD If you specify TRUNCATE REMARKS looks like this F ER DAT CUSTO QUANTITY REMARKS 25 AUG 86 123 144 In order to print the current dat This order must be s e and the name of each job in the top title enter the following For details on creating a date variable see Displaying the Current Date in Titles under Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions in Chapter 4 SQL gt COLU JOB NOPRINT NEW_VALUE JOBVAR SQL gt COLU TODAY NOPRINT NEW_VALUE DATEVAR SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SKIP PAGE ON TODAY SQL gt TTITLE CENTER Job Report RIGHT DATEVAR SKIP 2 gt EFT Job JOBVAR SKIP 2 SQL gt SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE MM DD YY TODAY 2 ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO 3 FROME WHERE JOB IN CLERK SALESMAN 4 ORDER BY JOB ENAME 8 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Your two page report would look similar to the following report with Job Report centered within your current linesize Job Report 11 23 98 Job CLERK NAME MGR HIREDATE SAL D
348. with the extension SQL enter SQL gt PRINTRPT To run a command file named WKRPT with the extension ORY enter SQL gt WKRPT ORY Command Reference 8 7 double at sign double at sign Purpose Runs a command file This command is identical to the at sign command except that it looks for the specified command file in the same path as the command file from which it was called Syntax file_name ext Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause file_name ext Represents the nested command file you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter When you enter file_name ext from within a command file SQL Plus runs file_name ext from the same directory as the command file When you enter file_name ext interactively SOL Plus runs file_name ext from the current working directory If SQL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus searches a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search Consult the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment Usage Notes You can include in a command file any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL
349. ximum 2850 To compute the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label SQL gt COLU DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SAL B SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME 2 FROME W O 3 HERE DEPTNO lt 20 4 RDER BY DEPTNO Command Reference 8 47 COMPUTE SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 8750 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 10875 If instead you do not want to print the label only the salary total at the end of the report SQL gt COLU DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt EAK ON DUMMY SQL gt SELEC ULL DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL HERE DEPTNO lt 20 R BY DEPTNO N osu w 8 SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 19625 8 48 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CONNECT CONNECT Purpose Connects a given username to Oracle Syntax CONN ECT logon AS SYSOPER SYSDBA w
350. y all table names column names and commands in this Guide appear in capital letters You can enter three kinds of commands at the command prompt SQL commands for working with information in the database a PL SQL blocks also for working with information in the database SQL Plus commands for formatting query results setting options and editing and storing SQL commands and PL SQL blocks Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 5 Entering and Executing Commands The manner in which you continue a command on additional lines end a command or execute a command differs depending on the type of command you wish to enter and run Examples of how to run and execute these types of commands are found on the following pages Getting Help To get online help for SQL Plus commands type HELP at the command prompt followed by the name of the command For example SQL gt HELP ACCEPT If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator For more details about the help system see the HELP command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Executing Commands After you enter the command and direct SQL Plus to execute it SQL Plus processes the command and re displays the command prompt indicating that you can enter another command Running SQL Commands The SQL command language enables you to manipulate data in the database See your Oracle8i SQL Reference for information on individual SQL

SQL*Plus User`s Guide and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents